Mercurial > emacs
annotate etc/NEWS @ 36720:d587de1b655a
(Deletion): Fix last change.
author | Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Sun, 11 Mar 2001 17:55:15 +0000 |
parents | 71ed61a53b19 |
children | 78751f7bca48 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
35326
f30feeecf1c1
backward-delete-char-untabify-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-01-16 |
f30feeecf1c1
backward-delete-char-untabify-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25853 | 3 See the end for copying conditions. |
4 | |
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | |
30922 | 6 For older news, see the file ONEWS |
25853 | 7 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
8 |
25995 | 9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
10 | |
36039 | 11 See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and |
12 fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra | |
13 charsets in this release. | |
14 | |
30576 | 15 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added. |
16 | |
31007 | 17 ** Support for LynxOS has been added. |
18 | |
28166 | 19 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using |
20 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. | |
21 | |
22 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for | |
29962
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
23 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure' |
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
24 to list them. |
29696 | 25 |
29972 | 26 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs |
30786 | 27 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available. |
30467
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
28 |
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
29 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit |
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
30 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available. |
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
31 |
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
32 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which |
32182 | 33 support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the |
33484 | 34 maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to |
35 build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any | |
36 necessary changes to unexec. | |
30576 | 37 |
32428 | 38 ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the |
39 new display features described below. | |
40 | |
32865
34e286ed22a5
Say that Emacs can now be built on the Macintosh.
Andrew Choi <akochoi@shaw.ca>
parents:
32845
diff
changeset
|
41 ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement |
32966 | 42 all of the new display features described below. The port currently |
34204
10c8428f0fd1
Point to the Mac OS chapter in the docs.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34191
diff
changeset
|
43 lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the |
10c8428f0fd1
Point to the Mac OS chapter in the docs.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34191
diff
changeset
|
44 "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the |
10c8428f0fd1
Point to the Mac OS chapter in the docs.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34191
diff
changeset
|
45 description of aspects specific to the Mac. |
32428 | 46 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
47 |
28166 | 48 * Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
49 | |
36350
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
50 +++ |
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
51 ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows. |
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
52 This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on |
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
53 MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made |
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
54 before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now. |
080a94708b56
Document the change whereby EMACSLOCKDIR is no longer used on Windows.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36275
diff
changeset
|
55 |
35578 | 56 ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom |
57 group. | |
58 | |
35326
f30feeecf1c1
backward-delete-char-untabify-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
59 ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the |
35680 | 60 behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. [This change was made |
35326
f30feeecf1c1
backward-delete-char-untabify-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
61 in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.] |
f30feeecf1c1
backward-delete-char-untabify-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
62 |
35220 | 63 ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to |
64 let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting. | |
65 | |
35223 | 66 ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the |
35169 | 67 current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the |
68 beginning and end of the buffer. | |
69 | |
35064 | 70 ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face |
71 symbol, not double-quoted. | |
72 | |
34671 | 73 ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future |
35064 | 74 version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline, |
75 rnews, rnewspost. Their implementations have been moved to | |
76 lisp/obsolete. | |
34671 | 77 |
34103 | 78 +++ |
34692 | 79 ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding |
80 system for keyboard input. | |
81 | |
82 +++ | |
34271 | 83 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
84 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
85 | |
86 +++ | |
34125
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
87 ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave |
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
88 as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy |
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
89 with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One |
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
90 example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the |
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
91 middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs. |
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
92 |
be313b2af8df
Mention msdos-set-mouse-buttons.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34103
diff
changeset
|
93 +++ |
34102 | 94 ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been |
95 changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a | |
96 buffer by default. | |
97 | |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
98 ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the |
33990 | 99 trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
100 this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'. |
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
101 |
33559 | 102 ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will |
35937 | 103 be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is |
104 non-nil. | |
33559 | 105 |
32511
03ea9c0d24d1
Document that loading `jka-compr.el' doesn't turn on
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32466
diff
changeset
|
106 ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el. |
03ea9c0d24d1
Document that loading `jka-compr.el' doesn't turn on
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32466
diff
changeset
|
107 To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the |
03ea9c0d24d1
Document that loading `jka-compr.el' doesn't turn on
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32466
diff
changeset
|
108 `auto-compression-mode' command. |
03ea9c0d24d1
Document that loading `jka-compr.el' doesn't turn on
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32466
diff
changeset
|
109 |
32303 | 110 ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for |
111 `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME. | |
112 | |
32281 | 113 +++ |
32037 | 114 ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now |
115 operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode. | |
116 | |
31924
e218cb644b08
Add entry for Info using emacs header-lines.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31894
diff
changeset
|
117 ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line |
e218cb644b08
Add entry for Info using emacs header-lines.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31894
diff
changeset
|
118 (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it |
e218cb644b08
Add entry for Info using emacs header-lines.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31894
diff
changeset
|
119 remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior |
e218cb644b08
Add entry for Info using emacs header-lines.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31894
diff
changeset
|
120 may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'. |
e218cb644b08
Add entry for Info using emacs header-lines.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31894
diff
changeset
|
121 |
32314 | 122 +++ |
31894 | 123 ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It |
124 is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia. | |
125 | |
126 +++ | |
127 ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor | |
128 mode `iswitchb-mode'. | |
129 | |
32314 | 130 +++ |
31742 | 131 ** Gnus changes. |
132 | |
133 The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in | |
134 four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment, | |
135 internationalization and mail-fetching. | |
136 | |
137 *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the | |
138 many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone. | |
139 | |
140 If you used procmail like in | |
141 | |
142 (setq nnmail-use-procmail t) | |
143 (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail) | |
144 (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/") | |
145 (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in") | |
146 | |
31858
269d69b69fe4
Update hideshow.el section.
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
31827
diff
changeset
|
147 this now has changed to |
31742 | 148 |
149 (setq mail-sources | |
150 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/" | |
151 :suffix ".in"))) | |
152 | |
153 More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods -> | |
154 Getting Mail -> Mail Sources | |
155 | |
156 *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of | |
157 Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details. | |
34334 | 158 Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no |
159 longer work; remove them and use the native facilities. | |
160 | |
34461 | 161 The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to |
162 use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was | |
163 installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier. | |
31742 | 164 |
32182 | 165 *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many |
33364 | 166 parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There |
167 are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is | |
168 now just a compatibility layer. | |
31742 | 169 |
170 *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be | |
171 called to position point. | |
172 | |
173 *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in | |
174 summary buffers and NOV files. | |
175 | |
176 *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number | |
177 of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added. | |
178 | |
179 *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a | |
180 subtly different manner. | |
181 | |
182 *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive | |
183 and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with | |
184 ever-changing layouts. | |
185 | |
186 *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap. | |
187 | |
33627 | 188 *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support. |
31742 | 189 |
36039 | 190 +++ |
31742 | 191 ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO |
31741 | 192 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display |
193 more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of | |
194 empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a | |
195 window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this | |
196 on. | |
197 | |
31728 | 198 ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be |
199 set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a | |
200 file that is already visited under a different name. | |
201 | |
31807 | 202 ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to |
203 nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size. | |
204 | |
205 ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the | |
206 recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is | |
207 signaled. | |
208 | |
31728 | 209 ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM |
31641 | 210 support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode, |
211 use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the | |
212 buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands | |
213 M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a | |
214 new command M-x strokes-list-strokes. | |
215 | |
31248 | 216 +++ |
31728 | 217 ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name |
32280 | 218 and displays information about that. |
31248 | 219 |
31728 | 220 ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init |
30930 | 221 file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer. |
222 | |
36537
71ed61a53b19
Mention Czech reference card.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36525
diff
changeset
|
223 ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card |
71ed61a53b19
Mention Czech reference card.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36525
diff
changeset
|
224 have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex', |
71ed61a53b19
Mention Czech reference card.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36525
diff
changeset
|
225 `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included. |
30871 | 226 |
34461 | 227 ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available. |
228 | |
30871 | 229 ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is |
34923 | 230 `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in |
231 `fr-drdref.tex'. | |
30871 | 232 |
30693 | 233 ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular |
234 expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination. | |
235 | |
236 This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to | |
237 determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a | |
238 mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be | |
239 interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the | |
240 regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode | |
241 associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'. | |
242 | |
32308
cd03345c07c1
Mark `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
32303
diff
changeset
|
243 +++ |
30339
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
244 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not |
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
245 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the |
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
246 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode |
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
247 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu. |
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
248 |
30222 | 249 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains |
250 a version-dependent component. | |
251 | |
35297
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35278
diff
changeset
|
252 ** The new user-option `delete-key-deletes-forward' can be set to |
34555 | 253 let the Delete function key delete forward instead of backward. |
254 | |
255 On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen | |
256 according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace | |
257 key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the | |
258 option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to | |
35723 | 259 delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. |
34555 | 260 |
261 If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes | |
262 a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the | |
263 Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via | |
264 `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on | |
265 the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting if you don't | |
266 have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys. | |
267 | |
268 Programmatically, you can call function | |
269 delete-key-deletes-forward-mode to toggle the behavior of the Delete | |
270 key. | |
30155 | 271 |
29752 | 272 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set |
273 using that menu. | |
274 | |
29532
9609bc6529ac
executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
29509
diff
changeset
|
275 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is |
31007 | 276 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'. |
29532
9609bc6529ac
executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
29509
diff
changeset
|
277 |
31022
2fa78512b45e
Mark the operation of chosing safe coding system as explained
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31020
diff
changeset
|
278 +++ |
29509 | 279 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if |
280 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer | |
281 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or | |
282 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and | |
283 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment, | |
284 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding. | |
285 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system. | |
286 | |
31020
2f1815d3e9ae
Mark inhibit-iso-escape-detection as updated in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31019
diff
changeset
|
287 +++ |
30296 | 288 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs' |
289 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's | |
290 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores | |
291 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is | |
292 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you | |
30357 | 293 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to |
30296 | 294 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c |
30357 | 295 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1 |
296 RET C-x C-f filename RET. | |
30205 | 297 |
29506 | 298 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the |
299 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'. | |
300 | |
31007 | 301 +++ |
29506 | 302 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at |
303 point in a pop-up window. | |
304 | |
31024
147670916de0
Mark list-charset-chars as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31022
diff
changeset
|
305 +++ |
29506 | 306 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and |
307 displays all characters in that character set. | |
308 | |
309 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based | |
310 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8. | |
311 | |
31026
3cd6db455d11
Mark comment-dwim as described in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31024
diff
changeset
|
312 +++ |
29218
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
313 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based |
31026
3cd6db455d11
Mark comment-dwim as described in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31024
diff
changeset
|
314 on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill, |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
315 defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
316 commenting with the variable `comment-style'. |
29218
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
317 |
31007 | 318 +++ |
28919 | 319 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively. |
320 | |
28912 | 321 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have |
322 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'. | |
323 | |
31007 | 324 +++ |
28799 | 325 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and |
326 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail | |
327 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the | |
328 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive. | |
329 | |
31007 | 330 +++ |
28699 | 331 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a |
332 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory. | |
28776
49a91eb4274c
Describe the different auto-save-file-list-prefix on MS-DOS.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28759
diff
changeset
|
333 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.) |
28699 | 334 You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location. |
335 | |
31007 | 336 +++ |
28695 | 337 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines |
338 on the display using several methods | |
339 | |
31007 | 340 +++ |
28695 | 341 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be |
342 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should | |
343 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames. | |
344 | |
31007 | 345 +++ |
28695 | 346 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is |
33838 | 347 equivalent to specifying the frame parameter. |
28695 | 348 |
28870 | 349 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line. |
28695 | 350 |
351 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is | |
352 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only. | |
353 | |
31007 | 354 +++ |
29752 | 355 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create |
28660 | 356 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The |
29752 | 357 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c, |
28660 | 358 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window. |
28626 | 359 |
31007 | 360 +++ |
28525
05658544eaff
backup-directory-alist, make-backup-file-name-function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
28506
diff
changeset
|
361 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and |
28757 | 362 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups, |
363 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory. | |
28525
05658544eaff
backup-directory-alist, make-backup-file-name-function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
28506
diff
changeset
|
364 |
28396 | 365 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1 |
366 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities. | |
367 | |
31028
b72824a73f3c
Mark load-dangerous-libraries as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31026
diff
changeset
|
368 +++ |
28159 | 369 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't |
370 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change | |
371 this behavior. | |
372 | |
373 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte | |
374 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let | |
375 Emacs dump core. | |
376 | |
31007 | 377 +++ |
28159 | 378 ** New X resources recognized |
27994 | 379 |
28140 | 380 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
381 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode | |
382 is useful for debugging X problems. | |
383 | |
384 Example: | |
385 | |
28159 | 386 emacs.synchronous: true |
28140 | 387 |
27994 | 388 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
389 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of | |
27995 | 390 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, |
391 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid | |
392 visual class names are | |
27994 | 393 |
394 TrueColor | |
395 PseudoColor | |
396 DirectColor | |
397 StaticColor | |
398 GrayScale | |
399 StaticGray | |
400 | |
401 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. | |
402 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same | |
403 meaning. | |
404 | |
27995 | 405 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes |
406 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If | |
407 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default | |
408 visual. | |
409 | |
410 Example: | |
411 | |
28159 | 412 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 |
27994 | 413 |
414 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', | |
415 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the | |
416 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized | |
417 resource values are `true' or `on'. | |
418 | |
27995 | 419 Example: |
420 | |
28159 | 421 emacs.privateColormap: true |
27995 | 422 |
27966
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
423 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is |
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
424 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is |
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
425 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. |
b8b910003631
Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27881
diff
changeset
|
426 |
34564
546b9aec6cd6
Mark show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows aas documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34555
diff
changeset
|
427 +++ |
27847 | 428 ** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to |
27845 | 429 display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is |
27847 | 430 shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can |
431 be customized. | |
27845 | 432 |
31007 | 433 +++ |
27770 | 434 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
435 | |
31007 | 436 +++ |
27473 | 437 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes |
438 all frames except the selected one. | |
439 | |
27369 | 440 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
441 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. | |
442 | |
27356 | 443 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
30482
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
444 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and |
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
445 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus |
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
446 displayed by Emacs now have help strings. |
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
447 |
31058
8a6816ab9887
Mark mouse-highlight on MS-DOS as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31053
diff
changeset
|
448 +++ |
30482
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
449 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the |
d9af2c1682d5
Help strings are supported on MS-Windows and MS-DOS as well.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30477
diff
changeset
|
450 MS-DOS version of Emacs. |
27356 | 451 |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
452 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
453 read mail from the menu etc. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
454 |
31030
5f19633e9dc2
Mark hexl-insert-hex-string as documented.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31028
diff
changeset
|
455 +++ |
28658 | 456 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts |
457 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer. | |
458 | |
35937 | 459 +++ |
35716 | 460 ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore. |
461 If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with | |
462 `(msb-mode 1)'. | |
463 | |
28626 | 464 ** Changes in Texinfo mode. |
465 | |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
466 *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo |
28626 | 467 macros |
468 | |
469 Key binding Macro | |
470 ------------------------- | |
471 C-c C-c C-s @strong | |
472 C-c C-c C-e @emph | |
33862
09fdef086f4d
C-c C-c u in Texinfo now produces @uref, not @url.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
33838
diff
changeset
|
473 C-c C-c u @uref |
28626 | 474 C-c C-c q @quotation |
33862
09fdef086f4d
C-c C-c u in Texinfo now produces @uref, not @url.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
33838
diff
changeset
|
475 C-c C-c m @email |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
476 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block> |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
477 M-RET @item |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
478 |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
479 *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context. |
28626 | 480 |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
481 ** Changes in Outline mode. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
482 |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
483 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
484 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
485 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
486 |
31858
269d69b69fe4
Update hideshow.el section.
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
31827
diff
changeset
|
487 ** Changes to Emacs Server |
31009 | 488 |
31032
16697e53a439
Mark server-kill-new-buffers as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31030
diff
changeset
|
489 +++ |
16697e53a439
Mark server-kill-new-buffers as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31030
diff
changeset
|
490 *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do |
31009 | 491 with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers |
492 are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with | |
493 Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which | |
494 buffers to kill, as before. | |
495 | |
496 Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client, | |
31032
16697e53a439
Mark server-kill-new-buffers as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31030
diff
changeset
|
497 i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in |
31009 | 498 this way. |
499 | |
30788 | 500 ** Changes to Show Paren mode. |
501 | |
502 *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property. | |
503 The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to | |
504 use. Default is 1000. | |
505 | |
31034
6e746a746c96
Mark check-parens as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31032
diff
changeset
|
506 +++ |
27200 | 507 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
508 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). | |
509 | |
31007 | 510 +++ |
511 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either | |
512 M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET. | |
513 M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special | |
514 buffers. | |
515 | |
516 +++ | |
26432
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
517 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) |
35867
aec170580429
Update entry for mouse-wheel support.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
35863
diff
changeset
|
518 under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or |
aec170580429
Update entry for mouse-wheel support.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
35863
diff
changeset
|
519 customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'. |
aec170580429
Update entry for mouse-wheel support.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
35863
diff
changeset
|
520 |
aec170580429
Update entry for mouse-wheel support.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
35863
diff
changeset
|
521 The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount' |
26432
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
522 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. |
23b09a47da5c
added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents:
26417
diff
changeset
|
523 |
26417 | 524 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows |
525 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing | |
526 `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
527 | |
25853 | 528 ** Faces and frame parameters. |
529 | |
530 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. | |
531 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
532 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face | |
533 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' | |
534 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise | |
535 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame | |
536 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. | |
537 | |
538 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the | |
539 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters | |
26264 | 540 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
25853 | 541 `default' face and vice versa. |
542 | |
31036
b8536256a5e8
Mark the `menu' face as already documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31034
diff
changeset
|
543 +++ |
25951 | 544 ** New face `menu'. |
545 | |
546 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. | |
547 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported; | |
548 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case. | |
549 | |
31007 | 550 +++ |
25853 | 551 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
552 | |
553 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for | |
554 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma | |
555 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies | |
556 the screen gamma of a frame's display. | |
557 | |
558 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result | |
559 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD | |
560 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). | |
561 | |
562 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class | |
563 `ScreenGamma'. | |
564 | |
565 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. | |
566 | |
567 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. | |
568 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing | |
569 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height | |
570 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in | |
571 the text. | |
572 | |
573 ** Emacs has a new face implementation. | |
574 | |
575 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the | |
576 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, | |
577 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. | |
578 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together | |
579 specify a font. | |
580 | |
581 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. | |
582 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found | |
583 under Lisp changes, below. | |
584 | |
34728
49d020898574
Clarify that new default font only applies under X.
Jason Rumney <jasonr@gnu.org>
parents:
34692
diff
changeset
|
585 ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X. |
25853 | 586 |
31007 | 587 +++ |
588 ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor | |
589 of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; | |
590 otherwise, it is hollow. | |
25853 | 591 |
592 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display | |
593 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The | |
594 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by | |
595 customizing face `fringe'. | |
596 | |
33720
0635513f22a2
Correct spelling of `mode-line'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33693
diff
changeset
|
597 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. |
0635513f22a2
Correct spelling of `mode-line'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33693
diff
changeset
|
598 You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'. |
35438 | 599 In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D |
600 appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line | |
601 occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of | |
602 the window to be partially obscured.) | |
33720
0635513f22a2
Correct spelling of `mode-line'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33693
diff
changeset
|
603 |
0635513f22a2
Correct spelling of `mode-line'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33693
diff
changeset
|
604 The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older |
0635513f22a2
Correct spelling of `mode-line'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33693
diff
changeset
|
605 versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil, |
0635513f22a2
Correct spelling of `mode-line'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33693
diff
changeset
|
606 and its use is deprecated. |
25853 | 607 |
608 ** LessTif support. | |
609 | |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
610 Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see |
35567 | 611 <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92 or later. |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
612 Please use LessTif's Motif 1.2 emulation; the emulations of Motif 2.0 |
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
613 and 2.1 are known not to work well with Emacs. |
25853 | 614 |
615 ** Toolkit scroll bars. | |
616 | |
617 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for | |
618 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when | |
619 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll | |
620 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll | |
621 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring | |
622 Emacs. | |
623 | |
624 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how | |
625 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from | |
626 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your | |
627 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a | |
628 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take | |
629 `s/freebsd.h' as an example. | |
630 | |
631 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take | |
632 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the | |
633 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on | |
634 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your | |
635 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', | |
636 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. | |
637 | |
638 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or | |
639 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. | |
640 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's | |
641 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since | |
642 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. | |
643 | |
644 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. | |
645 | |
646 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit | |
647 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for | |
648 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. | |
649 | |
31007 | 650 +++ |
25853 | 651 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. |
652 | |
653 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing | |
654 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is | |
655 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy | |
656 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not | |
657 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the | |
658 whitespace. | |
659 | |
31040
5c62643e2061
Mark busy-cursor as being documented.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31036
diff
changeset
|
660 +++ |
36259 | 661 ** Hourglass pointer |
662 | |
663 Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can | |
664 turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. | |
25853 | 665 |
31007 | 666 +++ |
25853 | 667 ** Blinking cursor |
668 | |
669 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on | |
670 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking | |
671 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in | |
672 the group `cursor'. | |
673 | |
32314 | 674 +++ |
25853 | 675 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. |
676 | |
677 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is | |
678 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. | |
679 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more | |
680 details. | |
681 | |
682 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't | |
683 have to do anything to activate it. | |
684 | |
685 ** Tabs and variable-width text. | |
686 | |
687 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is | |
688 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is | |
689 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. | |
690 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. | |
691 | |
692 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar | |
693 | |
31007 | 694 +++ |
25853 | 695 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". |
696 | |
697 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 | |
698 | |
28677
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
699 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the |
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
700 LessTif/Motif one. |
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
701 |
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
702 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in |
950ff4674e17
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28660
diff
changeset
|
703 LessTif and Motif. |
25853 | 704 |
31042
bff0e9c38c5d
Mark automatic-hscrolling as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31040
diff
changeset
|
705 +++ |
25853 | 706 ** Hscrolling in C code. |
707 | |
28695 | 708 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if |
709 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be | |
710 customized. | |
25853 | 711 |
34749 | 712 If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or |
713 scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound | |
714 for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll | |
715 the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more | |
716 to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc. | |
717 | |
32314 | 718 +++ |
25853 | 719 ** Tool bar support. |
720 | |
721 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details | |
32428 | 722 of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level |
723 changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is | |
34060 | 724 displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved |
725 if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome | |
726 icons will be used. | |
727 | |
728 To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons | |
729 for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would | |
730 also be useful manually to touch up some of the PBM icons. | |
25853 | 731 |
31007 | 732 +++ |
25853 | 733 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
734 | |
735 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made | |
736 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode | |
737 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help | |
738 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or | |
739 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one. | |
740 | |
741 Currently, the following actions have been defined: | |
742 | |
743 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two | |
744 buffers. | |
745 | |
746 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and | |
747 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list. | |
748 | |
749 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu. | |
750 | |
31007 | 751 - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or |
752 `*') toggles the status. | |
25853 | 753 |
35421 | 754 - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu. |
25853 | 755 |
756 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. | |
757 | |
758 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name | |
26652 | 759 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is |
25853 | 760 non-nil. |
761 | |
762 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. | |
763 | |
764 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. | |
765 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if | |
766 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and | |
767 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. | |
768 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face | |
29962
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
769 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored |
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
770 on terminals. |
25853 | 771 |
33007
69af14800f67
Document support for -fg, -bg, and -rv on TTY frames.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
32966
diff
changeset
|
772 The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now |
69af14800f67
Document support for -fg, -bg, and -rv on TTY frames.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
32966
diff
changeset
|
773 supported on character terminals. |
69af14800f67
Document support for -fg, -bg, and -rv on TTY frames.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
32966
diff
changeset
|
774 |
25853 | 775 ** Sound support |
776 | |
30012 | 777 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware |
30121
f67697912c81
Correct a typo ("aka as" -> "a.k.a.").
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30111
diff
changeset
|
778 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently |
30012 | 779 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au). |
25853 | 780 |
31007 | 781 +++ |
25853 | 782 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives |
783 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be | |
784 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this | |
785 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system | |
786 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, | |
787 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. | |
788 | |
789 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. | |
790 | |
31045
a82ae0d01b33
Mark x-stretch-cursor as being documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31042
diff
changeset
|
791 +++ |
25853 | 792 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. |
793 | |
794 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be | |
795 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set | |
796 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. | |
797 | |
31047
0a8115d19f8e
Mark indicate-empty-lines as being documented.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31045
diff
changeset
|
798 +++ |
25853 | 799 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a |
800 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi). | |
801 | |
802 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | |
803 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this | |
804 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. | |
805 | |
31127
acdb063c2011
Mark scroll-*-aggressively as being documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31124
diff
changeset
|
806 +++ |
25853 | 807 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. |
808 | |
809 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the | |
33624 | 810 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a |
25853 | 811 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
31124 | 812 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. |
25853 | 813 |
814 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the | |
35680 | 815 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a |
25853 | 816 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
31124 | 817 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. |
25853 | 818 |
819 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, | |
820 notably at the end of lines. | |
821 | |
822 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted | |
823 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. | |
824 | |
31007 | 825 +++ |
28132 | 826 There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle. |
827 | |
35640
6ed788afc91f
Document the incompatible change in string-rectangle.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35578
diff
changeset
|
828 ** `C-x r t' (string-rectangle) no longer deletes the existing |
6ed788afc91f
Document the incompatible change in string-rectangle.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35578
diff
changeset
|
829 rectangle contents before inserting the specified string on each line. |
6ed788afc91f
Document the incompatible change in string-rectangle.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35578
diff
changeset
|
830 The `replace-rectangle' command can be used if deletion is required. |
6ed788afc91f
Document the incompatible change in string-rectangle.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35578
diff
changeset
|
831 |
25853 | 832 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
833 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated | |
834 after each match to get the replacement text. | |
835 | |
31049
c5e2705a7119
Mark the `e' command in query-replace as being documented.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31047
diff
changeset
|
836 +++ |
29972 | 837 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets |
838 you edit the replacement string. | |
28805 | 839 |
31007 | 840 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets |
28805 | 841 you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to |
842 lisp-complete-symbol. | |
843 | |
31051
37d565afa4ae
Mark max-mini-window-height as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31049
diff
changeset
|
844 +++ |
25853 | 845 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. |
846 | |
29962
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
847 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are |
33309 | 848 longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it |
849 is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum | |
850 minibuffer window size by setting the following variables: | |
25853 | 851 |
852 - User option: max-mini-window-height | |
853 | |
854 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a | |
855 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it | |
33309 | 856 specifies a number of lines. |
25853 | 857 |
858 Default is 0.25. | |
859 | |
33309 | 860 - User option: resize-mini-windows |
861 | |
862 How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always | |
33838 | 863 resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows |
33309 | 864 grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk |
865 again. | |
866 | |
867 Default is `grow-only'. | |
868 | |
30111 | 869 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history. |
870 | |
27017 | 871 ** Changes to hideshow.el |
872 | |
873 *** Generalized block selection and traversal | |
874 | |
36039 | 875 A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings), |
876 and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp | |
877 serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. | |
878 See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'. | |
879 | |
880 *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, | |
881 hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can | |
882 be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of | |
883 the open block. | |
884 | |
885 *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a | |
886 function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of | |
887 the normal block-hiding function. | |
888 | |
889 *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed. | |
890 | |
891 *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions, | |
892 roughly imitating those of Outline mode. See the documentation for | |
893 `hs-minor-mode'. | |
31858
269d69b69fe4
Update hideshow.el section.
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
31827
diff
changeset
|
894 |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
895 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
896 |
31007 | 897 +++ |
31816 | 898 *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes |
899 an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making | |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
900 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
901 |
31007 | 902 +++ |
31816 | 903 **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the |
904 current buffer. | |
905 | |
906 +++ | |
907 *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries | |
908 in a log file. | |
909 | |
910 +++ | |
911 *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log | |
912 entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. | |
913 | |
914 +++ | |
915 *** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's | |
31007 | 916 version number is performed based on regular expressions from |
35680 | 917 `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized. |
31007 | 918 Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file. |
27005
e9167a5cfad2
Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26964
diff
changeset
|
919 |
32741
5f74213c8d48
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
32661
diff
changeset
|
920 *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting. |
31816 | 921 |
32661
51b05505a602
scheme-program-name -> cmuscheme-program-name
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32636
diff
changeset
|
922 ** Changes to cmuscheme |
51b05505a602
scheme-program-name -> cmuscheme-program-name
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32636
diff
changeset
|
923 |
51b05505a602
scheme-program-name -> cmuscheme-program-name
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32636
diff
changeset
|
924 *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed |
51b05505a602
scheme-program-name -> cmuscheme-program-name
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32636
diff
changeset
|
925 `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el. |
51b05505a602
scheme-program-name -> cmuscheme-program-name
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32636
diff
changeset
|
926 |
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
927 ** Changes in Font Lock |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
928 |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
929 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
930 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode. |
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
931 |
35680 | 932 *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should |
35420 | 933 set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults. |
32741
5f74213c8d48
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
32661
diff
changeset
|
934 |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
935 *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
936 the face used for each string/comment. |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
937 |
33913
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
938 *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'. |
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
939 Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code". |
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
940 |
26606 | 941 ** Comint (subshell) changes |
942 | |
32742
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
943 These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
944 include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc. |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
945 |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
946 *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
947 to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
948 parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
949 user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
950 this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
951 respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
952 feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
953 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'. |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
954 |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
955 *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes |
26606 | 956 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. |
957 | |
32742
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
958 *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and |
26606 | 959 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current |
960 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. | |
961 | |
962 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like | |
963 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of | |
964 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. | |
965 | |
32742
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
966 *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts, |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
967 and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features, |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
968 see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'. |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
969 |
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
970 *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s') |
32636
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
971 saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix |
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
972 argument, it appends to the file. |
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
973 |
32742
7424aeb6f60d
Clean up comint entries a bit.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32741
diff
changeset
|
974 *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output' |
32636
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
975 (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for |
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
976 compatibility. |
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
977 |
33139 | 978 *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input |
979 ring (history). | |
32636
f7b0f34a79a0
Document recent comint changes.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32572
diff
changeset
|
980 |
34979 | 981 *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for |
34983 | 982 identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp |
983 strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#". | |
34979 | 984 |
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
985 ** Changes to Rmail mode |
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
986 |
34060 | 987 *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
988 set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when |
28492 | 989 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the |
990 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default, | |
991 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself | |
992 as correspondent. | |
993 | |
994 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect | |
995 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a | |
29162 | 996 regexp matching your mail addresses. |
28492 | 997 |
28292 | 998 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how |
999 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an | |
1000 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation | |
1001 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask | |
1002 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p. | |
1003 | |
27361 | 1004 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, |
1005 like `j'. | |
1006 | |
27381
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
1007 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that |
622e861dce48
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27378
diff
changeset
|
1008 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a |
27378
af3075bcc264
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27369
diff
changeset
|
1009 digest message. |
26835
44fd08970a49
RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26834
diff
changeset
|
1010 |
29162 | 1011 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies |
1012 in which folder to put messages automatically. | |
1013 | |
35470
ec19fde3944d
Document rmail-redecode-body.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35469
diff
changeset
|
1014 *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message |
ec19fde3944d
Document rmail-redecode-body.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35469
diff
changeset
|
1015 with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly |
ec19fde3944d
Document rmail-redecode-body.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35469
diff
changeset
|
1016 due to missing or malformed "charset=" header. |
ec19fde3944d
Document rmail-redecode-body.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35469
diff
changeset
|
1017 |
26271 | 1018 ** Changes to TeX mode |
1019 | |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1020 *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to |
26271 | 1021 `latex-mode'. |
1022 | |
33411
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1023 *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm. |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1024 |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1025 *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs. |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1026 |
a873b191d4c5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33373
diff
changeset
|
1027 *** Added support for outline-minor-mode. |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
1028 |
25853 | 1029 ** Changes to RefTeX mode |
1030 | |
1031 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be | |
1032 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. | |
1033 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default | |
1034 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically | |
1035 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries | |
1036 can be edited from that buffer. | |
1037 | |
1038 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several | |
1039 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or | |
1040 `A' to use all marked entries). | |
1041 | |
1042 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce | |
1043 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. | |
1044 | |
1045 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' | |
1046 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order | |
1047 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has | |
1048 been cited. | |
1049 | |
26684
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
1050 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
1051 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
1052 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
1053 in column 1 are always made leaves. |
5ffc1f61b1d4
Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26652
diff
changeset
|
1054 |
25853 | 1055 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
1056 has the following new features: | |
1057 | |
1058 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern | |
1059 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like | |
1060 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable | |
1061 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. | |
1062 | |
1063 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This | |
1064 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source | |
1065 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the | |
1066 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching | |
1067 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it | |
1068 defaults to 1. | |
1069 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1070 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in |
29676 | 1071 file names. |
1072 | |
31007 | 1073 +++ |
25853 | 1074 ** Tooltips. |
1075 | |
1076 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current | |
33991 | 1077 mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can |
1078 turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'. | |
25853 | 1079 |
1080 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, | |
1081 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with | |
1082 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the | |
1083 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. | |
1084 | |
31007 | 1085 +++ |
25853 | 1086 ** Customize changes |
1087 | |
1088 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the | |
26096 | 1089 `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will |
1090 cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs. | |
25853 | 1091 |
1092 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill | |
1093 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the | |
1094 default). | |
1095 | |
26834
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1096 *** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1097 between custom options. Example: |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1098 |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1099 (defcustom default-input-method nil |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1100 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1101 This is the input method activated automatically by the command |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1102 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1103 :group 'mule |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1104 :type '(choice (const nil) string) |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1105 :set-after '(current-language-environment)) |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1106 |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1107 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1108 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1109 first in a custom-set-variables statement. |
782476a34d9d
Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26820
diff
changeset
|
1110 |
25853 | 1111 ** New features in evaluation commands |
1112 | |
30056 | 1113 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp |
25853 | 1114 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables |
1115 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the | |
1116 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, | |
1117 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. | |
1118 | |
30056 | 1119 *** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments |
1120 code when called with a prefix argument. | |
1121 | |
30564 | 1122 ** Ispell changes |
1123 | |
31061
457c0b39a922
Mark `ispell' and the DOZe'NT support as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31058
diff
changeset
|
1124 +++ |
30568
904cda56fa16
Fix typos in the entry for `ispell' command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30565
diff
changeset
|
1125 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if |
904cda56fa16
Fix typos in the entry for `ispell' command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30565
diff
changeset
|
1126 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it |
30564 | 1127 spell-checks the current buffer. |
1128 | |
31061
457c0b39a922
Mark `ispell' and the DOZe'NT support as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31058
diff
changeset
|
1129 +++ |
30937 | 1130 *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been |
1131 added. | |
1132 | |
1133 *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling | |
1134 correction is made and re-checked. | |
1135 | |
30948 | 1136 *** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added. |
30937 | 1137 |
1138 *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some | |
1139 cases. | |
1140 | |
1141 *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict | |
1142 on syntax errors. | |
1143 | |
1144 *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the | |
1145 end of the buffer. | |
1146 | |
25853 | 1147 ** Dired changes |
1148 | |
1149 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete | |
1150 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default | |
1151 is, delete only empty directories. | |
1152 | |
1153 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy | |
1154 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not | |
1155 copy directories recursively. | |
1156 | |
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1157 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1158 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1159 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1160 |
30111 | 1161 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a') |
1162 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or | |
1163 directory. | |
1164 | |
30278
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1165 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows |
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1166 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on. |
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1167 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so |
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1168 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as |
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1169 accurate or inaccurate as it is. |
88f980a73f48
Add entry for new `dired-show-file-type' command.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30222
diff
changeset
|
1170 |
30415 | 1171 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R' |
1172 from ls switches. | |
1173 | |
33291
90d32ce915cc
Note that dired now supplies a default when reading destination filenames.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33290
diff
changeset
|
1174 *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use |
90d32ce915cc
Note that dired now supplies a default when reading destination filenames.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33290
diff
changeset
|
1175 of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename, |
90d32ce915cc
Note that dired now supplies a default when reading destination filenames.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33290
diff
changeset
|
1176 which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single |
90d32ce915cc
Note that dired now supplies a default when reading destination filenames.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33290
diff
changeset
|
1177 source file, not when operating on multiple marked files. |
90d32ce915cc
Note that dired now supplies a default when reading destination filenames.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33290
diff
changeset
|
1178 |
25853 | 1179 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
1180 use the -f option when sending mail. | |
1181 | |
26820 | 1182 ** CC mode changes. |
1183 | |
1184 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with | |
1185 current user setups (although it's believed that these | |
1186 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). | |
1187 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled | |
1188 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward | |
1189 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this | |
1190 release. | |
1191 | |
30412 | 1192 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t. |
1193 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior | |
1194 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for | |
1195 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might | |
1196 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't | |
1197 have to bother. | |
1198 | |
1199 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing | |
1200 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally | |
30445 | 1201 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session. |
30412 | 1202 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of |
1203 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java" | |
1204 by default) to override the global settings made by the user. | |
1205 | |
26820 | 1206 *** New initialization procedure for the style system. |
1207 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the | |
1208 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now | |
1209 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This | |
1210 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific | |
1211 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it | |
1212 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with | |
1213 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. | |
1214 | |
1215 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new | |
1216 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from | |
1217 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting | |
1218 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described | |
1219 above. | |
1220 | |
1221 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* | |
1222 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode | |
1223 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a | |
1224 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- | |
1225 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style | |
1226 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values | |
1227 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the | |
1228 function documentation for more info. | |
1229 | |
1230 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, | |
1231 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or | |
1232 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is | |
1233 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, | |
1234 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system | |
1235 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current | |
1236 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and | |
1237 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. | |
1238 | |
1239 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) | |
1240 | |
1241 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. | |
1242 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. | |
1243 | |
1244 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style | |
1245 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be | |
1246 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when | |
1247 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the | |
1248 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the | |
1249 style system. | |
1250 | |
1251 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. | |
1252 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set | |
1253 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back | |
1254 as far as possible. | |
1255 | |
1256 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. | |
1257 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the | |
1258 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new | |
1259 chapter about this in the manual. | |
1260 | |
1261 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. | |
1262 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly | |
1263 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's | |
1264 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and | |
1265 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. | |
1266 | |
1267 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. | |
1268 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable | |
1269 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. | |
1270 | |
1271 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. | |
1272 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. | |
1273 | |
1274 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC | |
1275 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). | |
1276 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use | |
1277 inside CC Mode. | |
1278 | |
1279 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that | |
1280 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match | |
1281 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is | |
1282 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ | |
1283 cc-mode/). | |
1284 | |
1285 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. | |
1286 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in | |
1287 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string | |
1288 literals. | |
1289 | |
1290 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. | |
1291 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line | |
1292 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If | |
1293 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to | |
1294 this function. | |
1295 | |
1296 *** Fixes to IDL mode. | |
1297 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant | |
1298 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a | |
1299 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. | |
1300 Thanks to Eric Eide. | |
1301 | |
1302 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. | |
1303 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when | |
1304 opening braces hangs and when they don't. | |
1305 | |
1306 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. | |
1307 | |
1308 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. | |
1309 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a | |
1310 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, | |
1311 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. | |
1312 | |
1313 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the | |
1314 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in | |
1315 the column specified by comment-column. | |
1316 | |
1317 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. | |
1318 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation | |
1319 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line | |
1320 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that | |
1321 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally | |
1322 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. | |
1323 | |
1324 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start | |
1325 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup | |
1326 arguments. | |
1327 | |
1328 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. | |
1329 | |
1330 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions. | |
1331 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. | |
1332 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are | |
1333 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don | |
1334 Provan). | |
1335 | |
1336 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. | |
1337 | |
28506 | 1338 ** Makefile mode changes |
1339 | |
1340 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'. | |
1341 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1342 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when |
28506 | 1343 Fontlock mode is active. |
1344 | |
26407 | 1345 ** Isearch changes |
1346 | |
30477 | 1347 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history, |
1348 so that searches can be resumed. | |
1349 | |
1350 *** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r, | |
28506 | 1351 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys |
1352 that started the search. | |
1353 | |
26407 | 1354 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current |
25853 | 1355 selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
1356 | |
31063
e0e59380736b
Mark isearch-lazy-highlight as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31061
diff
changeset
|
1357 +++ |
26407 | 1358 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
1359 | |
26417 | 1360 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
26407 | 1361 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current |
1362 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as | |
1363 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are | |
1364 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1365 `secondary-selection'. |
26407 | 1366 |
1367 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor | |
1368 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. | |
1369 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion | |
1370 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its | |
1371 usual snappy response. | |
1372 | |
1373 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for | |
1374 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is | |
1375 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x | |
1376 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. | |
1377 | |
31064
3aa8be9f2e70
Mark sort-numeric-fields and sort-numeric-base as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31063
diff
changeset
|
1378 +++ |
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
1379 ** Changes in sort.el |
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
1380 |
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
1381 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' |
27533
6dfbe5197843
A typo ("ocatal" instead of "octal").
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27498
diff
changeset
|
1382 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The |
31064
3aa8be9f2e70
Mark sort-numeric-fields and sort-numeric-base as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31063
diff
changeset
|
1383 new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default |
27470
483c021bf376
Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27387
diff
changeset
|
1384 numeric base. |
26407 | 1385 |
28194 | 1386 ** Changes to Ange-ftp |
1387 | |
31007 | 1388 +++ |
28194 | 1389 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
25929 | 1390 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash |
1391 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) | |
1392 | |
28194 | 1393 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive |
1394 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. | |
1395 | |
30518
ba9bd1bf0ef8
Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30516
diff
changeset
|
1396 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which |
ba9bd1bf0ef8
Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30516
diff
changeset
|
1397 output ^M at the end of lines. |
ba9bd1bf0ef8
Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30516
diff
changeset
|
1398 |
25984 | 1399 ** Shell script mode changes. |
1400 | |
1401 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells | |
35680 | 1402 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and |
25984 | 1403 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. |
1404 | |
26264 | 1405 ** Etags changes. |
1406 | |
1407 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. | |
1408 | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
1409 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1410 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1411 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1412 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1413 a regular expression. The manual contains details. |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
1414 |
26264 | 1415 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function |
1416 declarations when given the --declarations option. | |
1417 | |
1418 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26277
diff
changeset
|
1419 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. |
26264 | 1420 |
35665
2ce207b252dc
Many changes to the parsing capabilities of etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35640
diff
changeset
|
1421 *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags |
36407
bd93619c67d4
Mention that etags switches to C++ when meets `template'.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
36350
diff
changeset
|
1422 automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or |
bd93619c67d4
Mention that etags switches to C++ when meets `template'.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
36350
diff
changeset
|
1423 `template' keywords. |
35665
2ce207b252dc
Many changes to the parsing capabilities of etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35640
diff
changeset
|
1424 |
2ce207b252dc
Many changes to the parsing capabilities of etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35640
diff
changeset
|
1425 *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in |
2ce207b252dc
Many changes to the parsing capabilities of etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35640
diff
changeset
|
1426 C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels. |
2ce207b252dc
Many changes to the parsing capabilities of etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35640
diff
changeset
|
1427 |
26264 | 1428 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and |
1429 types. | |
1430 | |
29238 | 1431 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged. |
26264 | 1432 |
1433 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface". | |
1434 | |
1435 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs | |
1436 are now tagged. | |
1437 | |
35297
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35278
diff
changeset
|
1438 *** In makefiles, tags the targets. |
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35278
diff
changeset
|
1439 |
26264 | 1440 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local |
1441 variables are tagged. | |
1442 | |
1443 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. | |
1444 | |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1445 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1446 for PSWrap. |
26264 | 1447 |
31066
8339f8e5c8c8
Mark etags.el changes as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31064
diff
changeset
|
1448 +++ |
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1449 ** Changes in etags.el |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1450 |
28244 | 1451 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make |
1452 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default | |
1453 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. | |
1454 | |
26728
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1455 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1456 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1457 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1458 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1459 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1460 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1461 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1462 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1463 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1464 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1465 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1466 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1467 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1468 A useful example value for this variable might be something like: |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1469 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1470 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1471 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1472 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1473 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1474 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1475 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1476 |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1477 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1478 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. |
8a531f428463
Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26718
diff
changeset
|
1479 |
34191 | 1480 *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself. |
1481 If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c | |
1482 /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c", | |
1483 "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the filename, | |
1484 point will go to the beginning of the file. | |
1485 | |
31007 | 1486 +++ |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1487 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1488 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1489 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
1490 |
31068
38395be86e6d
Mark the new language environments as documented.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31066
diff
changeset
|
1491 +++ |
29506 | 1492 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
1493 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets | |
1494 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). | |
36039 | 1495 GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have |
1496 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts. | |
36470 | 1497 There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only) |
1498 and Polish `slash'. | |
26016 | 1499 |
31007 | 1500 +++ |
35162 | 1501 ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'. |
35297
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35278
diff
changeset
|
1502 These new environments mainly select appropriate translations |
35162 | 1503 of the tutorial. |
1504 | |
36428 | 1505 ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for |
1506 function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs | |
1507 Lisp Coding Convention". | |
1508 | |
1509 new command old-binding | |
1510 --- ------- ----------- | |
1511 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5 | |
1512 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5 | |
1513 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5 | |
1514 | |
1515 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged | |
1516 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged | |
1517 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged | |
1518 | |
1519 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3 | |
1520 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6 | |
1521 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7 | |
1522 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8 | |
1523 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged | |
1524 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2 | |
1525 | |
35162 | 1526 +++ |
29962
cb2595f03c92
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
29949
diff
changeset
|
1527 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to |
26652 | 1528 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now |
1529 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. | |
1530 | |
1531 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. | |
1532 | |
31007 | 1533 +++ |
26768 | 1534 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
1535 | |
31070
5c579e72175d
Mark dabbrev-ignore-regexps as documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31068
diff
changeset
|
1536 +++ |
35937 | 1537 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps' |
28492 | 1538 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular |
1539 expression from that list, are not checked. | |
1540 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1541 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files. |
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1542 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file, |
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1543 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert |
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1544 the buffer, just like for the local files. |
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
1545 |
30829 | 1546 ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer. |
1547 | |
31279
90089bb22edf
Mark as documented in the manual the effect of prefix argument
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31248
diff
changeset
|
1548 +++ |
31231 | 1549 ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now |
1550 displays local abbrevs, only. | |
1551 | |
31388 | 1552 ** VC Changes |
1553 | |
1554 VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it | |
1555 easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp | |
1556 Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism | |
1557 to enable and disable support for particular version systems has | |
1558 changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable | |
36275
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1559 `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify |
31388 | 1560 version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file, |
1561 each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the | |
1562 file is registered in that backend. | |
1563 | |
1564 When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed | |
1565 backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the | |
1566 directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for | |
1567 master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then | |
1568 the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen. | |
1569 As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete. | |
1570 | |
1571 The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC | |
1572 still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for | |
1573 RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables | |
1574 vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS | |
1575 where it doesn't make sense.) | |
1576 | |
1577 The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also | |
1578 obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude | |
1579 `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now. | |
1580 | |
1581 *** General Changes | |
1582 | |
1583 The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding | |
1584 checks are always done now. | |
1585 | |
31858
269d69b69fe4
Update hideshow.el section.
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
31827
diff
changeset
|
1586 VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control |
31388 | 1587 operations. |
1588 | |
33111
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
1589 `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'. |
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
1590 `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'. |
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
1591 `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'. |
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
1592 |
33541 | 1593 The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the |
1594 first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the | |
1595 current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into | |
1596 the working file (``merge news''). | |
1597 | |
1598 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r | |
1599 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work | |
1600 downwards. | |
1601 | |
1602 *** Multiple Backends | |
1603 | |
1604 VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is | |
1605 useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS | |
1606 repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally | |
1607 commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your | |
1608 local RCS archives. | |
1609 | |
1610 To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example) | |
1611 should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote'' | |
1612 backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of | |
1613 `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.) | |
1614 | |
36275
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1615 You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1616 C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1617 a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1618 if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1619 current revision number from the more remote backend. |
33541 | 1620 |
1621 If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to | |
1622 another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change | |
1623 any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to | |
1624 pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally. | |
1625 | |
1626 After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your | |
1627 changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the | |
1628 local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry | |
1629 buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file. | |
1630 | |
31388 | 1631 *** Changes for CVS |
1632 | |
1633 There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the | |
1634 default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in | |
1635 remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined | |
1636 by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a | |
1637 regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts | |
1638 that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC | |
1639 queries the repository just as often as it does for local files. | |
1640 | |
33541 | 1641 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of |
1642 repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and | |
1643 revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without | |
1644 any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version | |
1645 backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version | |
1646 number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~ | |
1647 (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter | |
1648 of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other, | |
1649 the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted | |
33862
09fdef086f4d
C-c C-c u in Texinfo now produces @uref, not @url.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
33838
diff
changeset
|
1650 automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS, |
09fdef086f4d
C-c C-c u in Texinfo now produces @uref, not @url.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
33838
diff
changeset
|
1651 since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file |
09fdef086f4d
C-c C-c u in Texinfo now produces @uref, not @url.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
33838
diff
changeset
|
1652 name.) |
33541 | 1653 |
31388 | 1654 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the |
1655 repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit. | |
1656 If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to | |
33541 | 1657 commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the |
31388 | 1658 current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an |
1659 entire directory tree. | |
1660 | |
1661 The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call | |
1662 "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option | |
1663 is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are | |
1664 "watched" by other developers.) | |
1665 | |
33541 | 1666 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r |
1667 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give | |
36275
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1668 an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update', |
33541 | 1669 starting at the given directory. |
1670 | |
31388 | 1671 *** Lisp Changes in VC |
1672 | |
1673 VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now | |
1674 add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a | |
1675 library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and | |
1676 then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for | |
36275
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1677 a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1678 provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top |
31388 | 1679 of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library, |
36275
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1680 you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol |
44540d398934
Some corrections to the VC news.
André Spiegel <spiegel@gnu.org>
parents:
36259
diff
changeset
|
1681 `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'. |
31388 | 1682 |
36525
cb77fd8249b6
Change the `***' for the EDT entry to `**'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36470
diff
changeset
|
1683 ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT |
35163 | 1684 SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more |
1685 terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs. | |
1686 See etc/edt-user.doc for more information. | |
1687 | |
25853 | 1688 ** New modes and packages |
1689 | |
34394
d6a4dd5cd345
Entry for `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34389
diff
changeset
|
1690 *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode' |
d6a4dd5cd345
Entry for `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34389
diff
changeset
|
1691 automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when |
d6a4dd5cd345
Entry for `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34389
diff
changeset
|
1692 the default is not applicable. |
d6a4dd5cd345
Entry for `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34389
diff
changeset
|
1693 |
33618 | 1694 *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines, |
1695 rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The | |
1696 shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \. | |
1697 | |
1698 Features are: | |
1699 | |
1700 - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is | |
1701 drawn, like this: | \ / | |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
1702 --+-- X |
33618 | 1703 | / \ |
1704 | |
1705 - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the | |
1706 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If | |
1707 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a | |
1708 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will | |
1709 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line | |
1710 you are drawing. | |
1711 | |
1712 - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight) | |
1713 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >. | |
1714 | |
1715 - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by | |
1716 flood-filling. | |
1717 | |
1718 - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular | |
1719 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be | |
1720 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in | |
1721 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa. | |
33796
10ffa5b56f53
mention `delete-trailing-whitespace'
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
33720
diff
changeset
|
1722 |
33618 | 1723 - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can |
1724 also do without the mouse. | |
1725 | |
1726 - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to | |
1727 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares | |
1728 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your | |
1729 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio, | |
1730 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round. | |
1731 | |
1732 - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented: | |
1733 | |
1734 lines straight-lines | |
1735 rectangles squares | |
1736 poly-lines straight poly-lines | |
1737 ellipses circles | |
1738 text (see-thru) text (overwrite) | |
1739 spray-can setting size for spraying | |
1740 vaporize line vaporize lines | |
1741 erase characters erase rectangles | |
1742 | |
1743 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or | |
1744 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in | |
1745 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while | |
1746 drawing. | |
1747 | |
1748 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines | |
1749 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are | |
1750 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired | |
1751 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>. | |
1752 | |
1753 - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this | |
1754 can be turned off). | |
1755 | |
31019
2ec8d313faf7
Mark timeclock.el as being described in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31009
diff
changeset
|
1756 +++ |
32448
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1757 *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1758 implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it. |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1759 It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1760 functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1761 history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1762 will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1763 the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1764 rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell, |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1765 all within the scope of your Emacs process. |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1766 |
4925b241a9ac
Added a note about Eshell.
John Wiegley <johnw@newartisans.com>
parents:
32428
diff
changeset
|
1767 +++ |
30781 | 1768 *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time |
1769 intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the | |
1770 typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working | |
1771 on certain projects. | |
1772 | |
31071
93f2d24e3942
Mark hi-lock.el as being documented in the manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31070
diff
changeset
|
1773 +++ |
35927 | 1774 *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches |
1775 of interactively entered regexps. For example, | |
30789 | 1776 |
1777 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET | |
30565 | 1778 |
1779 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background | |
1780 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are | |
1781 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting. | |
1782 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of | |
1783 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the | |
1784 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the | |
35927 | 1785 corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches |
1786 to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match. | |
30565 | 1787 |
31007 | 1788 +++ |
30789 | 1789 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when |
30565 | 1790 Emacs is idle. |
1791 | |
30319 | 1792 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML |
1793 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however. | |
1794 | |
29218
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1795 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el |
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1796 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should |
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1797 be more robust while offering the same functionality. |
33913
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
1798 `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only |
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
1799 comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary. |
29218
e956cc90f6c0
newcomment and the change of binding for M-;
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
29162
diff
changeset
|
1800 |
31007 | 1801 +++ |
28879 | 1802 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags |
1803 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a | |
1804 separate Texinfo file. | |
1805 | |
31007 | 1806 +++ |
1807 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or | |
1808 by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument) | |
1809 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with | |
1810 `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to | |
35680 | 1811 enter check-in log messages. |
31007 | 1812 |
1813 +++ | |
28834 | 1814 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages |
1815 without invoking external programs. | |
1816 | |
1817 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp | |
1818 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike | |
1819 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it | |
1820 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and | |
28955
6cfd3ddf0911
Correct a typo in description of `woman.el'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28946
diff
changeset
|
1821 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available. |
28834 | 1822 |
1823 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man | |
1824 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does. | |
1825 | |
31073
f35042c35352
Mark re-build as being documented.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31071
diff
changeset
|
1826 +++ |
28098 | 1827 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
1828 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. | |
1829 | |
1830 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for | |
1831 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in | |
1832 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. | |
1833 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so | |
1834 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a | |
1835 single step. | |
1836 | |
1837 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like | |
1838 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will | |
1839 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp | |
1840 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. | |
1841 | |
31007 | 1842 +++ |
27644 | 1843 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
1844 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without | |
1845 actually modifying content of a buffer. | |
1846 | |
27498 | 1847 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
1848 PostScript. | |
1849 | |
1850 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. | |
1851 | |
1852 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: | |
1853 | |
1854 ; comment (until end of line) | |
1855 A non-terminal | |
1856 "C" terminal | |
1857 ?C? special | |
1858 $A default non-terminal | |
1859 $"C" default terminal | |
1860 $?C? default special | |
1861 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) | |
1862 C D sequence (C occurs before D) | |
1863 C | D alternative (C or D occurs) | |
1864 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) | |
1865 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) | |
1866 (C) group (expression C is grouped together) | |
1867 [C] optional (C may or not occurs) | |
1868 C+ one or more occurrences of C | |
1869 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C | |
1870 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C | |
1871 {C} zero or more occurrences of C | |
1872 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
1873 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* | |
1874 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
1875 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] | |
1876 | |
1877 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. | |
1878 | |
27328 | 1879 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
1880 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, | |
1881 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for | |
1882 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the | |
1883 equal signs of assignments. | |
1884 | |
31007 | 1885 +++ |
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1886 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1887 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. |
8ce11c7a7fcb
read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27200
diff
changeset
|
1888 |
31007 | 1889 +++ |
27016 | 1890 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
1891 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a | |
1892 buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to | |
1893 customize the package. | |
1894 | |
29696 | 1895 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp. |
1896 | |
27733 | 1897 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
1898 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it | |
1899 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, | |
1900 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should | |
1901 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool | |
1902 which answers different needs. | |
1903 | |
31007 | 1904 +++ |
26964
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1905 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1906 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1907 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1908 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1909 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1910 to be enabled. |
2939daf50656
Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26933
diff
changeset
|
1911 |
31007 | 1912 +++ |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1913 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1914 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
1915 |
31007 | 1916 +++ |
25853 | 1917 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
1918 | |
31007 | 1919 +++ |
25853 | 1920 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line. |
1921 | |
1922 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. | |
1923 | |
35578 | 1924 Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and |
31936 | 1925 `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will |
1926 disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to | |
1927 `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This | |
1928 displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground | |
1929 and background colors. | |
1930 | |
25853 | 1931 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object |
1932 Pascal) language. | |
1933 | |
31156 | 1934 +++ |
25853 | 1935 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on |
1936 the text at point. | |
1937 | |
1938 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. | |
1939 | |
31007 | 1940 +++ |
25862 | 1941 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
1942 | |
35163 | 1943 *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus |
1944 whitespace in a file. | |
25853 | 1945 |
25992 | 1946 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
1947 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including | |
1948 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for | |
1949 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and | |
1950 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / | |
1951 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal | |
1952 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. | |
1953 | |
1954 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. | |
1955 | |
1956 Here is an example of columns: | |
1957 | |
1958 horse apple bus | |
1959 dog pineapple car EXTRA | |
1960 porcupine strawberry airplane | |
1961 | |
1962 Doing the following settings: | |
1963 | |
1964 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") | |
1965 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") | |
1966 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") | |
1967 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") | |
1968 | |
1969 | |
1970 Selecting the lines above and typing: | |
1971 | |
1972 M-x delimit-columns-region | |
1973 | |
1974 It results: | |
1975 | |
1976 [ horse , apple , bus , ] | |
1977 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] | |
1978 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] | |
1979 | |
1980 delim-col has the following options: | |
1981 | |
1982 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted | |
1983 before all columns. | |
1984 | |
1985 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted | |
1986 between each column. | |
1987 | |
1988 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted | |
1989 after all columns. | |
1990 | |
1991 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates | |
1992 each column. | |
1993 | |
1994 delim-col has the following commands: | |
1995 | |
1996 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. | |
1997 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. | |
1998 | |
31007 | 1999 +++ |
26030
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
2000 *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that |
30319 | 2001 were operated on recently. |
2002 | |
2003 M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode. | |
2004 | |
2005 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable | |
2006 recentf at Emacs startup. | |
2007 | |
2008 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu | |
2009 filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent | |
2010 file list can be displayed: | |
2011 | |
2012 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules. | |
35680 | 2013 - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending. |
2014 - showing paths relative to the current default-directory | |
30319 | 2015 |
2016 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to | |
2017 dynamically change the menu appearance. | |
26030
c5e8559a53cb
Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26016
diff
changeset
|
2018 |
26149 | 2019 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
2020 text. | |
2021 | |
31007 | 2022 +++ |
26924 | 2023 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
26786 | 2024 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
2025 specific to Message mode. | |
2026 | |
31007 | 2027 +++ |
26924 | 2028 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
2029 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files | |
2030 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. | |
2031 | |
31007 | 2032 +++ |
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
2033 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
2034 interface to access directory servers using different directory |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
2035 protocols. It has a separate manual. |
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
2036 |
28132 | 2037 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
2038 for Autoconf, selected automatically. | |
2039 | |
31007 | 2040 +++ |
28710 | 2041 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows. |
28855
1be9a502caca
Cleaned some left over bogus conflict markers.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28854
diff
changeset
|
2042 |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2043 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the |
28710 | 2044 minibuffer with completion. |
27714
22a581e00fe4
Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27693
diff
changeset
|
2045 |
28883 | 2046 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration |
2047 with the diary features. | |
2048 | |
28912 | 2049 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby |
2050 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting. | |
2051 | |
29814 | 2052 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto |
2053 Fill mode. | |
2054 | |
32182 | 2055 *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in |
2056 Gnus facilities. | |
2057 | |
33020 | 2058 *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion |
2059 facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main | |
2060 difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning | |
2061 they can be profiled, debugged, etc. | |
32465 | 2062 |
33290 | 2063 +++ |
2064 ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping | |
2065 paragraphs filled as you modify them. | |
2066 | |
2067 +++ | |
2068 ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files | |
2069 to be visited as images. | |
2070 | |
25853 | 2071 ** Withdrawn packages |
2072 | |
2073 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same | |
2074 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. | |
26133 | 2075 |
27369 | 2076 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
2077 | |
2078 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. | |
29102 | 2079 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
2080 |
33991 | 2081 * Incompatible Lisp changes |
2082 | |
2083 There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and | |
2084 may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference. | |
35421 | 2085 See the sections below for details. |
33991 | 2086 |
35297
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35278
diff
changeset
|
2087 ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom |
35847
83b8f5ad1f97
Several typos fixed. From Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35784
diff
changeset
|
2088 `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties. |
35421 | 2089 Use `copy-sequence' and `set-text-properties'. |
33991 | 2090 |
2091 ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code | |
2092 which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability) | |
2093 may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from | |
2094 these properties are active. | |
2095 | |
34029 | 2096 ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search |
33991 | 2097 ranges may affect some code. |
34017 | 2098 |
2099 ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook | |
2100 buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might | |
2101 make a difference to some code. | |
2102 | |
34029 | 2103 ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which |
2104 operates on the minibuffer. | |
2105 | |
34087
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2106 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2107 cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2108 different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2109 (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results). |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2110 Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2111 character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2112 multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2113 encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2114 reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2115 sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2116 a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2117 the buffer as multibyte characters. |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2118 |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2119 Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2120 MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2121 appropriate for reading truly binary files. |
4fcc3c4e9b0f
Explain why `no-conversion' is no longer appropriate for reading
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34060
diff
changeset
|
2122 |
34617 | 2123 ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and |
35242
910222f6a03c
Tell them to use before-change-functions and after-change-functions
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35223
diff
changeset
|
2124 `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use |
910222f6a03c
Tell them to use before-change-functions and after-change-functions
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35223
diff
changeset
|
2125 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead. |
34617 | 2126 |
2127 ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as | |
2128 long promised. | |
2129 | |
36244 | 2130 ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of |
2131 extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new | |
2132 dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than | |
2133 one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard | |
2134 charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes | |
2135 the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule | |
36470 | 2136 encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will |
2137 probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21. | |
36113
1a29f6d22f6e
Mention potential incompatibilities due to new dimension-2 charsets.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36039
diff
changeset
|
2138 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
2139 |
29102 | 2140 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual, |
2141 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.) | |
2142 | |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
2143 ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of |
35125 | 2144 function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no |
2145 args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated | |
2146 (signal or normal termination). | |
2147 | |
33373 | 2148 +++ |
35090 | 2149 ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements |
2150 from a list are now available without requiring the CL package. | |
2151 | |
2152 +++ | |
34271 | 2153 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
2154 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. | |
2155 | |
2156 +++ | |
33373 | 2157 ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies |
2158 alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font. | |
2159 | |
34054 | 2160 ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum". |
33364 | 2161 |
34017 | 2162 +++ |
32913 | 2163 ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually |
2164 deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame | |
2165 being deleted. | |
2166 | |
34017 | 2167 +++ |
32845
e92097fd9144
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
32751
diff
changeset
|
2168 ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg. |
e92097fd9144
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
32751
diff
changeset
|
2169 |
32259
cae38860a9ee
Add entry for `display-message-or-buffer'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32257
diff
changeset
|
2170 +++ |
32466 | 2171 ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed. |
32465 | 2172 If a range in a regular expression or the arg of |
2173 skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends | |
2174 with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is | |
2175 C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's | |
2176 charset. | |
2177 | |
2178 +++ | |
32259
cae38860a9ee
Add entry for `display-message-or-buffer'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32257
diff
changeset
|
2179 ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in |
cae38860a9ee
Add entry for `display-message-or-buffer'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32257
diff
changeset
|
2180 the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the |
cae38860a9ee
Add entry for `display-message-or-buffer'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32257
diff
changeset
|
2181 message. |
cae38860a9ee
Add entry for `display-message-or-buffer'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32257
diff
changeset
|
2182 |
32050
2a3bcf8d9877
Add entries for `auto-image-file-mode' and `with-auto-compression-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32037
diff
changeset
|
2183 ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an |
2a3bcf8d9877
Add entries for `auto-image-file-mode' and `with-auto-compression-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32037
diff
changeset
|
2184 expression with auto-compression-mode enabled. |
2a3bcf8d9877
Add entries for `auto-image-file-mode' and `with-auto-compression-mode'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32037
diff
changeset
|
2185 |
34017 | 2186 +++ |
31636 | 2187 ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced |
2188 with the more general `:mask' property. | |
2189 | |
34017 | 2190 +++ |
35364 | 2191 ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's. |
31728 | 2192 |
31561 | 2193 ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a |
2194 backslash. | |
2195 | |
31007 | 2196 +++ |
2197 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs | |
2198 is running in batch mode. For example, | |
2199 | |
2200 (message "%s" (read t)) | |
2201 | |
2202 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result | |
2203 to standard output. | |
2204 | |
2205 +++ | |
2206 ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list', | |
2207 `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional. | |
2208 | |
30564 | 2209 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer' |
2210 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new | |
2211 frame or window. | |
2212 | |
31156 | 2213 +++ |
30516 | 2214 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences |
2215 were added | |
2216 | |
2217 - Function: remove ELT SEQ | |
2218 | |
35680 | 2219 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be |
30516 | 2220 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'. |
2221 | |
2222 - Function: remq ELT LIST | |
2223 | |
35680 | 2224 Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The |
30516 | 2225 comparison is done with `eq'. |
2226 | |
34017 | 2227 +++ |
30516 | 2228 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings. |
30511 | 2229 |
30502 | 2230 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table |
2231 has been changed. | |
2232 | |
31007 | 2233 +++ |
30357 | 2234 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string |
2235 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may | |
2236 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary. | |
2237 | |
34017 | 2238 +++ |
30219 | 2239 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function |
2240 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string. | |
30203 | 2241 |
30158
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
2242 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the |
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
2243 function was declared obsolete. |
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
2244 |
34017 | 2245 +++ |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2246 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is |
30158
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
2247 retained as an alias). |
84d54b049d67
make-obsolete, plist-member changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30155
diff
changeset
|
2248 |
30068
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2249 ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs. |
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2250 It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result |
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2251 is automatically converted to Emacs' form. |
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2252 |
30038 | 2253 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined |
2254 | |
33620 | 2255 - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF |
2256 | |
2257 Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or | |
2258 omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use | |
2259 the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window, | |
2260 even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the | |
2261 minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t | |
2262 means never include the minibuffer window. | |
30038 | 2263 |
30006 | 2264 ** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows |
2265 | |
2266 - Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT | |
2267 | |
2268 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE. | |
2269 | |
2270 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows', | |
2271 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as | |
2272 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil | |
2273 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is | |
2274 returned. | |
2275 | |
2276 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even | |
2277 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff | |
2278 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the | |
2279 minibuffer even if it is active. | |
2280 | |
2281 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer | |
2282 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count | |
2283 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame | |
2284 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts, | |
2285 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you | |
2286 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window. | |
2287 | |
2288 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument. | |
2289 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above. | |
2290 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames. | |
2291 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames. | |
2292 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames. | |
2293 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame. | |
2294 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame. | |
2295 | |
30564 | 2296 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and |
2297 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional | |
2298 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed. | |
29657 | 2299 |
29637 | 2300 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a |
2301 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that | |
30290 | 2302 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x. |
2303 Default value is nil. | |
29637 | 2304 |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2305 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil, |
29633 | 2306 meaning no limit. |
2307 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2308 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred |
29509 | 2309 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and |
2310 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified, | |
2311 | |
34001 | 2312 +++ |
2313 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument | |
2314 list of a primitive. | |
29238 | 2315 |
33111
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
2316 ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps. |
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
2317 |
34001 | 2318 +++ |
29286 | 2319 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the |
2320 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property. | |
2321 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather | |
2322 than replacing the local map. | |
2323 | |
35250 | 2324 ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and |
2325 `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been | |
2326 removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' | |
2327 instead. | |
29498 | 2328 |
2329 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'. | |
2330 | |
31156 | 2331 +++ |
33111
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
2332 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, |
bbf383648e4d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33020
diff
changeset
|
2333 as promised long ago. |
30339
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
2334 |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2335 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float. |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
2336 |
25853 | 2337 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) |
2338 | |
2339 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
2340 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
2341 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
2342 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
2343 | |
30933
3a89352a7dab
Document save-restriction fix.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30930
diff
changeset
|
2344 *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the |
3a89352a7dab
Document save-restriction fix.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30930
diff
changeset
|
2345 buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside |
3a89352a7dab
Document save-restriction fix.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30930
diff
changeset
|
2346 the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved |
3a89352a7dab
Document save-restriction fix.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30930
diff
changeset
|
2347 restriction to be restored incorrectly. |
3a89352a7dab
Document save-restriction fix.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
30930
diff
changeset
|
2348 |
29506 | 2349 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include |
2350 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list | |
36470 | 2351 when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a |
29506 | 2352 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer. |
2353 | |
2354 *** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and | |
2355 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it | |
2356 contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set. | |
2357 | |
2358 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is | |
2359 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern | |
2360 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character | |
2361 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if | |
2362 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the | |
2363 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra | |
2364 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset | |
2365 eight-bit-graphic. | |
2366 | |
2367 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables. | |
2368 | |
35847
83b8f5ad1f97
Several typos fixed. From Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35784
diff
changeset
|
2369 A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for |
29506 | 2370 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a |
2371 character set as previously. | |
2372 | |
2373 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed. | |
2374 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function | |
2375 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER. | |
2376 | |
2377 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic | |
2378 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the | |
2379 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that | |
2380 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset. | |
2381 | |
2382 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family | |
35847
83b8f5ad1f97
Several typos fixed. From Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35784
diff
changeset
|
2383 name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font. |
29506 | 2384 |
2385 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset | |
2386 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset | |
2387 "fontset-default". | |
2388 | |
2389 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second | |
2390 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets. | |
2391 | |
2392 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character | |
2393 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in | |
2394 buffers and strings. | |
2395 | |
2396 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite | |
2397 character' which is an independent character with a unique character | |
2398 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters' | |
2399 have been deleted: composite-char-component, | |
2400 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule, | |
2401 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete. | |
2402 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have | |
2403 also been deleted. | |
2404 | |
2405 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to | |
2406 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable | |
2407 `reference-point-alist' for more detail. | |
2408 | |
2409 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and | |
2410 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a | |
2411 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters | |
2412 may differ between buffer and string text. | |
2413 | |
2414 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END, | |
2415 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC. | |
2416 | |
2417 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition' | |
2418 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string. | |
2419 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property | |
2420 `composition' from STRING. | |
2421 | |
2422 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about | |
2423 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string. | |
2424 | |
2425 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as | |
2426 obsolete. | |
2427 | |
36039 | 2428 ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on |
2429 the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text. | |
2430 | |
33290 | 2431 ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff', |
35937 | 2432 `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been |
2433 introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, | |
2434 U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively. | |
2435 | |
2436 ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added. It provides | |
2437 limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For details, please | |
2438 see the documentation string of this coding system. | |
35557 | 2439 |
29506 | 2440 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and |
35937 | 2441 `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese |
2442 standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2. | |
2443 | |
2444 ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15' | |
2445 have been introduced. | |
29506 | 2446 |
2447 +++ | |
2448 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' | |
35937 | 2449 have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and |
36470 | 2450 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of |
2451 eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the | |
2452 emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the | |
2453 buffer/string internal representation. | |
29506 | 2454 |
28883 | 2455 +++ |
28847 | 2456 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to |
2457 that offset in the file before writing. | |
2458 | |
30068
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2459 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and |
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2460 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode). |
28724 | 2461 |
28710 | 2462 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the |
2463 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer | |
2464 from which the command was issued. | |
2465 | |
2466 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp', | |
2467 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp', | |
2468 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two | |
2469 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to | |
2470 operate on. | |
2471 | |
28658 | 2472 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative |
2473 to `window-buffer-height'. | |
2474 | |
2475 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW | |
2476 | |
2477 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END. | |
2478 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual | |
2479 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc. | |
2480 | |
2481 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max' | |
2482 respectively. | |
2483 | |
35680 | 2484 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument |
28658 | 2485 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil. |
2486 | |
2487 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for | |
2488 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so | |
2489 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters. | |
2490 | |
2491 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current | |
2492 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes | |
2493 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it | |
2494 is currently displayed in some window. | |
2495 | |
28556 | 2496 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the |
2497 argument function's results. | |
2498 | |
28496 | 2499 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now |
2500 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. | |
2501 | |
28492 | 2502 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body' |
31859 | 2503 header in the list of headers passed to it. |
28492 | 2504 |
2505 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but | |
2506 ignores differences in case and text representation. | |
2507 | |
2508 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the | |
28323 | 2509 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted |
2510 as follows: | |
2511 | |
2512 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default) | |
2513 nil don't display a cursor | |
2514 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width | |
2515 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH | |
2516 others display a box cursor. | |
2517 | |
28303 | 2518 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether |
2519 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a | |
2520 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not | |
2521 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning. | |
2522 | |
28194 | 2523 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax |
28854
a5c81109bc31
Mention PCL-CVS.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28847
diff
changeset
|
2524 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to |
28194 | 2525 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' |
2526 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. | |
2527 | |
2528 Example: | |
2529 | |
2530 (string-to-syntax "()") | |
2531 => (4 . 41) | |
2532 | |
28166 | 2533 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases |
2534 other than 10. | |
2535 | |
2536 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). | |
2537 INTEGER optionally contains a sign. | |
2538 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2539 #b1111 |
28166 | 2540 => 15 |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2541 #b-1111 |
28166 | 2542 => -15 |
2543 | |
2544 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). | |
2545 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2546 #o666 |
28166 | 2547 => 438 |
2548 | |
2549 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). | |
2550 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2551 #xbeef |
28166 | 2552 => 48815 |
2553 | |
2554 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. | |
2555 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2556 #2R-111 |
28166 | 2557 => -7 |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
2558 #25rah |
28166 | 2559 => 267 |
2560 | |
28335 | 2561 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of |
30068
fd80ab818a0c
Fix various typos.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
30056
diff
changeset
|
2562 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC |
28037 | 2563 and isn't a string. |
2564 | |
28335 | 2565 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for |
2566 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil | |
2567 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is | |
2568 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string. | |
2569 | |
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2570 +++ |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2571 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2572 |
28149 | 2573 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
27881
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2574 for a regexp in a string. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2575 |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2576 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2577 `mouse-position-function'. |
f54471f7b913
replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27847
diff
changeset
|
2578 |
27827 | 2579 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
2580 that don't fit into a Lisp integer. | |
2581 | |
27820 | 2582 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
2583 Keywords are now always considered constants. | |
2584 | |
27770 | 2585 +++ |
2586 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and | |
2587 returns it. | |
2588 | |
27276 | 2589 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
2590 returned by function `recent-keys'. | |
2591 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2592 +++ |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2593 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2594 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2595 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2596 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2597 mode. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2598 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2599 +++ |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
2600 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
2601 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. |
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
2602 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2603 +++ |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2604 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2605 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2606 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2607 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2608 been performed." |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2609 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2610 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2611 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2612 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2613 then the self-inserting character is not inserted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2614 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2615 +++ |
26737 | 2616 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
2617 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, | |
2618 and the function's value is nil if it is not found. | |
2619 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2620 +++ |
26467 | 2621 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
2622 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a | |
2623 specified table. | |
2624 | |
2625 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) | |
2626 | |
2627 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of | |
26541
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
2628 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
2629 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is |
ce6bf7b42bc7
--with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26525
diff
changeset
|
2630 what BODY returns. |
26467 | 2631 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2632 +++ |
27693
d8bedafef8d5
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27644
diff
changeset
|
2633 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
28063
f1b33463506d
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
28051
diff
changeset
|
2634 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
35680 | 2635 Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the |
33913
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
2636 corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet). |
0c780fd30da5
New font-lock-doc-face.
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
33862
diff
changeset
|
2637 Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\'). |
27094
6500fd0a7d8e
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
27092
diff
changeset
|
2638 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2639 +++ |
26397
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
2640 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
2641 removed since it wasn't used by anything. |
17d6fe2e2d0f
Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26360
diff
changeset
|
2642 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2643 +++ |
26360
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
2644 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
2645 instead of being optional. |
5370b1c171ef
Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26359
diff
changeset
|
2646 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2647 +++ |
26277
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
2648 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
2649 modify read-only text. |
32e16b70ae15
New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26271
diff
changeset
|
2650 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2651 +++ |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2652 ** New functions and variables for locales. |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2653 |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2654 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2655 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and |
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2656 time functions like strftime. The new variables |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2657 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2658 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2659 |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2660 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2661 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from |
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2662 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG |
26525
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2663 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2664 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2665 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and |
4df5920724de
Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26467
diff
changeset
|
2666 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. |
26140
068f7ad41d40
Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
26133
diff
changeset
|
2667 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2668 +++ |
26107
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
2669 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
2670 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
2671 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
2672 start sequences. |
5bdae485eb03
*** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents:
26096
diff
changeset
|
2673 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2674 +++ |
25910
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
2675 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
2676 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. |
918acea58309
Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25862
diff
changeset
|
2677 |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2678 +++ |
25853 | 2679 ** New function `propertize' |
2680 | |
2681 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct | |
2682 strings with text properties. | |
2683 | |
2684 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES | |
2685 | |
2686 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified | |
2687 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with | |
2688 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the | |
2689 specified value of that property. Example: | |
2690 | |
2691 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) | |
2692 | |
2693 +++ | |
2694 ** push and pop macros. | |
2695 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2696 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2697 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols |
25853 | 2698 as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
2699 | |
2700 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. | |
2701 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it | |
2702 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME). | |
2703 | |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2704 ** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2705 |
27387
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
2706 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
d0a7127b33e5
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27385
diff
changeset
|
2707 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. |
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2708 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2709 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2710 Execute body once for each element of LIST, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2711 using the variable VAR to hold the current element. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2712 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2713 |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2714 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2715 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2716 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2717 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
f7b7fdb0f3f4
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
27381
diff
changeset
|
2718 |
25853 | 2719 +++ |
34166 | 2720 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as |
2721 [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character | |
2722 class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period | |
2723 or a sign. | |
25853 | 2724 |
2725 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9 | |
2726 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters | |
2727 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. | |
2728 [:blank:] matches space and tab only | |
2729 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, | |
2730 space, and DEL. | |
2731 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars | |
2732 and DEL. | |
2733 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits. | |
2734 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
2735 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
2736 [:alpha:] matches letters. | |
2737 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
2738 it matches anything that has word syntax.) | |
2739 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. | |
2740 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. | |
2741 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case. | |
2742 [:punct:] matches punctuation. | |
2743 (But at present, for multibyte characters, | |
2744 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) | |
2745 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. | |
2746 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case. | |
2747 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. | |
2748 | |
2749 +++ | |
2750 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. | |
2751 | |
2752 The following functions are defined for hash tables: | |
2753 | |
2754 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS | |
2755 | |
2756 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments | |
2757 are optional. The following arguments are defined: | |
2758 | |
2759 :test TEST | |
2760 | |
2761 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. | |
2762 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, | |
2763 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. | |
2764 | |
2765 :size SIZE | |
2766 | |
2767 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how | |
2768 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. | |
2769 | |
2770 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE | |
2771 | |
2772 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes | |
2773 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old | |
2774 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > | |
2775 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the | |
2776 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. | |
2777 | |
2778 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD | |
2779 | |
2780 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the | |
2781 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / | |
2782 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. | |
2783 | |
2784 :weakness WEAK | |
2785 | |
30502 | 2786 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', |
2787 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as | |
2788 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage | |
2789 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere | |
2790 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. | |
25853 | 2791 |
2792 - Function: makehash &optional TEST | |
2793 | |
2794 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. | |
2795 | |
2796 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE | |
2797 | |
2798 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. | |
2799 | |
2800 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE | |
2801 | |
2802 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and | |
2803 values are shared. | |
2804 | |
2805 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE | |
2806 | |
2807 Returns the number of entries in TABLE. | |
2808 | |
2809 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
2810 | |
2811 Returns the rehash size of TABLE. | |
2812 | |
2813 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE | |
2814 | |
2815 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. | |
2816 | |
2817 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE | |
2818 | |
2819 Returns the size of TABLE. | |
2820 | |
30789 | 2821 - Function: hash-table-test TABLE |
25853 | 2822 |
2823 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. | |
2824 | |
2825 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE | |
2826 | |
2827 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. | |
2828 | |
2829 - Function: clrhash TABLE | |
2830 | |
2831 Clear TABLE. | |
2832 | |
2833 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT | |
2834 | |
2835 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if | |
2836 not found. | |
2837 | |
26264 | 2838 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
25853 | 2839 |
2840 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with | |
2841 another value, replace the old value with VALUE. | |
2842 | |
2843 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE | |
2844 | |
2845 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. | |
2846 | |
2847 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE | |
2848 | |
2849 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two | |
2850 arguments KEY and VALUE. | |
2851 | |
2852 - Function: sxhash OBJ | |
2853 | |
2854 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. | |
2855 | |
2856 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN | |
2857 | |
2858 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as | |
2859 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for | |
26264 | 2860 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
25853 | 2861 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
2862 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). | |
2863 | |
2864 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. | |
2865 | |
2866 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash | |
2867 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of | |
2868 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. | |
2869 | |
2870 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to | |
2871 be strings that are compared case-insensitively. | |
2872 | |
2873 (defun case-fold-string= (a b) | |
2874 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) | |
2875 | |
2876 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a) | |
2877 (sxhash (upcase a))) | |
2878 | |
26264 | 2879 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
25853 | 2880 'case-fold-string-hash)) |
2881 | |
2882 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) | |
2883 | |
2884 +++ | |
2885 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. | |
2886 | |
2887 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent | |
2888 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents | |
2889 a cons cell which is its own cdr. | |
2890 | |
2891 +++ | |
2892 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. | |
2893 | |
2894 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs | |
2895 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. | |
2896 | |
2897 +++ | |
2898 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or | |
2899 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the | |
2900 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it | |
2901 is too short to reach that column. | |
2902 | |
2903 +++ | |
2904 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may | |
2905 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION | |
2906 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with | |
2907 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. | |
2908 | |
2909 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, | |
2910 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily | |
2911 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. | |
2912 | |
2913 +++ | |
2914 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument | |
2915 to specify which buffer to return the size of. | |
2916 | |
2917 +++ | |
2918 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook | |
2919 calendar-move-hook after moving point. | |
2920 | |
2921 +++ | |
2922 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a | |
2923 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be | |
2924 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If | |
2925 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use | |
2926 temporary-file-directory instead. | |
2927 | |
2928 +++ | |
2929 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all | |
2930 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects | |
2931 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as | |
2932 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. | |
2933 | |
2934 +++ | |
2935 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the | |
2936 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car. | |
2937 | |
2938 +++ | |
2939 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. | |
2940 | |
2941 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually | |
2942 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, | |
2943 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. | |
2944 | |
2945 +++ | |
2946 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' | |
2947 | |
2948 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists | |
2949 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW | |
2950 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; | |
2951 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means | |
2952 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and | |
2953 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. | |
2954 | |
2955 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', | |
2956 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call | |
2957 to get an error if the file exists at that time. | |
2958 The error reported is `file-already-exists'. | |
2959 | |
2960 +++ | |
2961 ** Function `format' now handles text properties. | |
2962 | |
2963 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. | |
2964 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties | |
2965 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the | |
2966 result string. | |
2967 | |
2968 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result | |
2969 string where arguments appear in the result string. | |
2970 | |
2971 Example: | |
2972 | |
2973 (let ((s1 "hello, %s") | |
2974 (s2 "world")) | |
2975 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) | |
2976 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) | |
26034 | 2977 (format s1 s2)) |
25853 | 2978 |
2979 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. | |
2980 | |
2981 +++ | |
2982 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. | |
2983 | |
2984 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. | |
2985 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic | |
2986 argument in it. | |
2987 | |
2988 (let ((msg "hello, %s!") | |
2989 (arg "world")) | |
2990 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) | |
2991 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) | |
2992 (message msg arg)) | |
2993 | |
2994 +++ | |
2995 ** Sound support | |
2996 | |
2997 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs | |
2998 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). | |
2999 | |
3000 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio | |
3001 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' | |
3002 to enable sound support. | |
3003 | |
3004 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a | |
3005 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined | |
3006 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The | |
3007 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the | |
3008 sound to play, before playing the sound. | |
3009 | |
3010 The following sound properties are supported: | |
3011 | |
3012 - `:file FILE' | |
3013 | |
3014 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be | |
3015 searched relative to `data-directory'. | |
3016 | |
27148 | 3017 - `:data DATA' |
3018 | |
3019 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data | |
3020 may be present, but not both. | |
3021 | |
25853 | 3022 - `:volume VOLUME' |
3023 | |
3024 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range | |
3025 0..1. This property is optional. | |
3026 | |
33991 | 3027 - `:device DEVICE' |
3028 | |
3029 DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the | |
3030 sound. The default device is system-dependent. | |
3031 | |
25853 | 3032 Other properties are ignored. |
3033 | |
33991 | 3034 An alternative interface is called as |
3035 (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE). | |
3036 | |
25853 | 3037 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. |
26933 | 3038 |
34001 | 3039 +++ |
26933 | 3040 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being |
3041 a keyword symbol. | |
27145
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3042 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3043 ** Changes to garbage collection |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3044 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3045 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3046 of live and free strings. |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3047 |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3048 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3049 strings that have been consed so far. |
01abacc81cce
Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27144
diff
changeset
|
3050 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
3051 |
29151 | 3052 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs |
3053 Lisp Manual | |
3054 | |
33315 | 3055 +++ |
33309 | 3056 ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes |
3057 mini-windows. | |
3058 | |
34001 | 3059 +++ |
34389
779f5314f5fa
Update entry for `pos-visible-in-window-p'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34334
diff
changeset
|
3060 ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional |
779f5314f5fa
Update entry for `pos-visible-in-window-p'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34334
diff
changeset
|
3061 argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is |
779f5314f5fa
Update entry for `pos-visible-in-window-p'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
34334
diff
changeset
|
3062 returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil. |
32915
f8e686a581dc
Add entry for `pos-visible-in-window-p'.
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
32913
diff
changeset
|
3063 |
33309 | 3064 ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used. |
31220 | 3065 |
30222 | 3066 +++ |
3067 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text. | |
29939 | 3068 |
34001 | 3069 +++ |
29939 | 3070 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an |
3071 image. | |
3072 | |
3073 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME | |
3074 | |
3075 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT). | |
3076 | |
3077 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes | |
3078 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical | |
3079 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default | |
3080 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. | |
3081 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
3082 | |
34001 | 3083 +++ |
31639 | 3084 ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image |
3085 has a mask bitmap. | |
3086 | |
3087 - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME | |
3088 | |
3089 Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap. | |
3090 FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil | |
3091 or omitted means use the selected frame. | |
3092 | |
31156 | 3093 +++ |
29506 | 3094 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image |
3095 satisfying one of a list of specifications. | |
3096 | |
3097 +++ | |
3098 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now | |
3099 optional. | |
3100 | |
31156 | 3101 +++ |
3102 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see | |
3103 below). | |
29151 | 3104 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
3105 |
25853 | 3106 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 |
3107 | |
3108 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated. | |
3109 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual. | |
3110 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or --- | |
3111 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms. | |
3112 | |
28634 | 3113 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used |
3114 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs. | |
3115 | |
3116 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying | |
3117 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground | |
3118 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on | |
3119 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on | |
3120 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to | |
3121 just display it black instead. | |
3122 | |
3123 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put | |
3124 a line like | |
3125 | |
3126 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t) | |
3127 | |
3128 in your `.emacs'. | |
3129 | |
25853 | 3130 ** New face implementation. |
3131 | |
3132 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD | |
3133 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. | |
3134 | |
3135 +++ | |
3136 *** New faces. | |
3137 | |
3138 Each face can specify the following display attributes: | |
3139 | |
3140 1. Font family or fontset alias name. | |
26264 | 3141 |
25853 | 3142 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
3143 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. | |
26264 | 3144 |
25853 | 3145 3. Font height in 1/10pt |
26264 | 3146 |
25853 | 3147 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
26264 | 3148 |
25853 | 3149 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
26264 | 3150 |
25853 | 3151 6. Foreground color. |
26264 | 3152 |
25853 | 3153 7. Background color. |
3154 | |
3155 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. | |
3156 | |
3157 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. | |
3158 | |
3159 10. A background stipple, a bitmap. | |
3160 | |
3161 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. | |
3162 | |
3163 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what | |
3164 color. | |
3165 | |
3166 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its | |
3167 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. | |
3168 | |
3169 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the | |
3170 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different | |
3171 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named | |
3172 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector | |
35863
534be6e166a6
Yet another bunch of typo fizes from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35862
diff
changeset
|
3173 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face |
25853 | 3174 attributes mentioned above. |
3175 | |
3176 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face | |
3177 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly | |
3178 created frames. | |
26264 | 3179 |
25853 | 3180 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
3181 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called | |
3182 `fully-specified'. | |
3183 | |
3184 +++ | |
3185 *** Face merging. | |
3186 | |
3187 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by | |
3188 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any | |
3189 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text | |
3190 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure | |
3191 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always | |
3192 results in a fully-specified face. | |
3193 | |
3194 +++ | |
3195 *** Face realization. | |
3196 | |
3197 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by | |
3198 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The | |
3199 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically | |
3200 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized | |
3201 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face | |
3202 cache of the frame on which it was realized. | |
3203 | |
3204 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the | |
3205 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used | |
3206 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different | |
3207 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. | |
3208 | |
3209 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a | |
3210 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face | |
3211 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of | |
3212 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with | |
3213 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. | |
3214 | |
3215 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function | |
3216 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > | |
3217 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from | |
3218 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is | |
3219 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for | |
3220 Emacs. | |
3221 | |
3222 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with | |
3223 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same | |
3224 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent | |
3225 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. | |
3226 | |
32966 | 3227 +++ |
25853 | 3228 **** Clearing face caches. |
3229 | |
3230 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches | |
3231 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload | |
3232 unused fonts. | |
3233 | |
3234 +++ | |
3235 *** Font selection. | |
26264 | 3236 |
25853 | 3237 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
3238 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently | |
3239 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. | |
3240 | |
3241 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a | |
3242 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font | |
3243 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a | |
3244 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to | |
3245 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. | |
3246 | |
3247 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched | |
3248 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best | |
3249 match for the given face attributes in this font list. | |
3250 | |
3251 Font selection can be influenced by the user. | |
3252 | |
3253 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face | |
3254 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting | |
3255 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute | |
3256 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means | |
3257 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font | |
3258 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries | |
3259 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. | |
3260 | |
33373 | 3261 Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify |
3262 alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face | |
35297
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35278
diff
changeset
|
3263 doesn't exist. |
34630 | 3264 |
3265 Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify | |
35680 | 3266 all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a |
34630 | 3267 registry. |
3268 | |
35680 | 3269 Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are |
34630 | 3270 slightly different. |
3271 | |
3272 Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts. | |
3273 | |
25853 | 3274 |
3275 +++ | |
3276 **** Scalable fonts | |
3277 | |
3278 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, | |
3279 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 | |
3280 servers. | |
3281 | |
3282 To enable scalable font use, set the variable | |
26034 | 3283 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
25853 | 3284 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
3285 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A | |
3286 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from | |
3287 that list. Example: | |
3288 | |
3289 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) | |
3290 | |
3291 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. | |
3292 | |
3293 +++ | |
3294 *** Functions and variables related to font selection. | |
3295 | |
3296 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME | |
3297 | |
3298 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY | |
3299 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a | |
3300 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. | |
3301 | |
3302 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of | |
3303 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P | |
3304 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. | |
3305 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and | |
3306 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. | |
3307 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil | |
3308 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and | |
3309 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of | |
3310 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting | |
3311 of the face font sort order. | |
3312 | |
26264 | 3313 - Function: x-font-family-list |
25853 | 3314 |
3315 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is | |
3316 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses | |
3317 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is | |
3318 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. | |
3319 | |
3320 - Variable: font-list-limit | |
3321 | |
3322 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions | |
3323 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a | |
3324 matching font. The default is currently 100. | |
3325 | |
3326 +++ | |
3327 *** Setting face attributes. | |
3328 | |
3329 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible | |
3330 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now | |
3331 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and | |
3332 `face-attribute'. | |
3333 | |
3334 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword | |
3335 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. | |
3336 | |
3337 The following attributes are recognized: | |
3338 | |
3339 `:family' | |
3340 | |
3341 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', | |
3342 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' | |
3343 and `?' are allowed. | |
3344 | |
3345 `:width' | |
3346 | |
3347 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. | |
3348 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', | |
3349 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', | |
3350 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. | |
3351 | |
3352 `:height' | |
3353 | |
31183
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3354 VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3355 in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3356 scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3357 height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height. |
25853 | 3358 |
3359 `:weight' | |
3360 | |
3361 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
3362 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', | |
3363 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. | |
3364 | |
3365 `:slant' | |
3366 | |
3367 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the | |
3368 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or | |
3369 `reverse-oblique'. | |
3370 | |
3371 `:foreground', `:background' | |
3372 | |
3373 VALUE must be a color name, a string. | |
3374 | |
3375 `:underline' | |
3376 | |
3377 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If | |
3378 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is | |
3379 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly | |
3380 don't underline. | |
3381 | |
3382 `:overline' | |
3383 | |
3384 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If | |
3385 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a | |
3386 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't | |
3387 overline. | |
3388 | |
3389 `:strike-through' | |
3390 | |
3391 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line | |
3392 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the | |
3393 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE | |
3394 is nil, explicitly don't strike through. | |
3395 | |
3396 `:box' | |
3397 | |
3398 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn | |
3399 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If | |
3400 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color | |
3401 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, | |
3402 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, | |
3403 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH | |
3404 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from | |
3405 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as | |
3406 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it | |
3407 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is | |
3408 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background | |
3409 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box | |
3410 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking | |
3411 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box | |
3412 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if | |
3413 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D | |
3414 box. | |
3415 | |
3416 `:inverse-video' | |
3417 | |
3418 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in | |
3419 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. | |
3420 | |
3421 `:stipple' | |
3422 | |
3423 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. | |
3424 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are | |
3425 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH | |
3426 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA | |
3427 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means | |
3428 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. | |
3429 | |
3430 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', | |
3431 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: | |
3432 | |
3433 `:font' | |
3434 | |
3435 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid | |
3436 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font | |
3437 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous | |
3438 versions of Emacs. | |
3439 | |
3440 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can | |
3441 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE | |
3442 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." | |
3443 | |
3444 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and | |
3445 `defface'. | |
3446 | |
31183
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3447 `:inherit' |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3448 |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3449 VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3450 of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3451 like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces. |
cb5d69bcd655
Add description of new :inherit face attribute, and additional legal
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
31156
diff
changeset
|
3452 |
25853 | 3453 *** Face attributes and X resources |
3454 | |
3455 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes | |
3456 from X resources: | |
3457 | |
3458 Face attribute X resource class | |
3459 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
3460 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily | |
3461 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth | |
3462 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight | |
3463 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight | |
3464 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant | |
3465 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground | |
3466 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground | |
3467 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline | |
3468 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough | |
3469 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox | |
3470 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline | |
3471 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse | |
3472 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple | |
26264 | 3473 or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
25853 | 3474 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
3475 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
3476 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold | |
3477 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic | |
3478 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont | |
3479 | |
3480 +++ | |
3481 *** Text property `face'. | |
3482 | |
3483 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face | |
3484 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face | |
3485 specification can be | |
3486 | |
3487 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. | |
3488 | |
3489 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each | |
3490 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value | |
3491 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' | |
3492 for face attribute names. | |
3493 | |
3494 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or | |
3495 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is | |
3496 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. | |
3497 | |
3498 +++ | |
3499 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. | |
3500 | |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3501 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3502 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3503 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by |
25853 | 3504 default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3505 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
25853 | 3506 used to clear the mapping table. |
3507 | |
27092
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3508 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3509 |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3510 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3511 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3512 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3513 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3514 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3515 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3516 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3517 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3518 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3519 modify their color-related behavior. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3520 |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3521 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3522 any frame type. |
60f5b0f50db9
Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27076
diff
changeset
|
3523 |
27573
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3524 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3525 |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3526 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3527 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3528 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3529 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3530 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3531 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3532 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3533 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3534 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. |
32f4457e5501
Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
27533
diff
changeset
|
3535 |
25853 | 3536 +++ |
3537 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3538 |
25853 | 3539 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
33693
efa325b58d74
Mention that `minibuffer-prompt-properties' can be used to disallow
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33627
diff
changeset
|
3540 To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize |
efa325b58d74
Mention that `minibuffer-prompt-properties' can be used to disallow
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33627
diff
changeset
|
3541 the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the |
efa325b58d74
Mention that `minibuffer-prompt-properties' can be used to disallow
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
33627
diff
changeset
|
3542 `Inviolable' option. |
25853 | 3543 |
35680 | 3544 The function minibuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the |
25853 | 3545 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. |
3546 Otherwise, it returns zero. | |
3547 | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3548 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3549 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3550 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3551 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' |
30776 | 3552 property (which can be a text property or an overlay). |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3553 |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3554 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3555 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3556 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3557 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
27144 | 3558 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
3559 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding | |
3560 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these | |
3561 functions. | |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3562 |
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3563 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3564 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
26062
fd35581d53c1
Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26034
diff
changeset
|
3565 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
25853 | 3566 |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3567 The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3568 |
30776 | 3569 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3570 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3571 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. |
30776 | 3572 |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3573 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3574 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the |
35847
83b8f5ad1f97
Several typos fixed. From Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35784
diff
changeset
|
3575 constrained position if that is different. |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3576 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3577 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3578 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3579 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is |
30776 | 3580 constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3581 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3582 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent |
30776 | 3583 fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with |
3584 the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is | |
3585 also considered to be `on the boundary'. | |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3586 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3587 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3588 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3589 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3590 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3591 only in the case where they can still move to the right line. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3592 |
30776 | 3593 If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has |
3594 a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored. | |
3595 | |
3596 Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil. | |
3597 | |
3598 - Function: delete-field &optional POS | |
3599 | |
3600 Delete the field surrounding POS. | |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3601 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
30776 | 3602 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3603 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3604 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3605 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3606 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3607 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
30776 | 3608 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
3609 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its | |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3610 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3611 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3612 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3613 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3614 Return the end of the field surrounding POS. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3615 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
30776 | 3616 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
3617 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field, | |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3618 then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3619 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3620 - Function: field-string &optional POS |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3621 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3622 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3623 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
30776 | 3624 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3625 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3626 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3627 |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3628 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. |
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3629 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
30776 | 3630 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
26300
25356c16306f
Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26292
diff
changeset
|
3631 |
25853 | 3632 +++ |
3633 ** Image support. | |
3634 | |
3635 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving | |
3636 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of | |
3637 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value | |
3638 replaces the display of the characters having that property. | |
3639 | |
3640 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of | |
3641 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If | |
3642 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a | |
3643 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal | |
3644 area. | |
3645 | |
3646 IMAGE is an image specification. | |
3647 | |
3648 *** Image specifications | |
3649 | |
3650 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS | |
3651 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each | |
3652 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a | |
26403 | 3653 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
3654 described below are ignored. | |
25853 | 3655 |
3656 The following is a list of properties all image types share. | |
3657 | |
3658 `:ascent ASCENT' | |
3659 | |
28789 | 3660 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'. |
3661 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
3662 to use for its ascent. |
28789 | 3663 |
3664 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the | |
3665 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in. | |
3666 | |
30483
05fc373ff5b8
mention `float-time' and the remote file modtime check
Sam Steingold <sds@gnu.org>
parents:
30482
diff
changeset
|
3667 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a |
29151 | 3668 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position |
3669 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and | |
3670 overlays that apply to the image. | |
25853 | 3671 |
3672 `:margin MARGIN' | |
3673 | |
35278 | 3674 MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put |
3675 as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the | |
3676 horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0. | |
25853 | 3677 |
3678 `:relief RELIEF' | |
3679 | |
3680 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief | |
3681 around an image. | |
3682 | |
35364 | 3683 `:conversion ALGO' |
25853 | 3684 |
31636 | 3685 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. |
3686 | |
3687 ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss'' | |
3688 edge-detection algorithm to the image. | |
3689 | |
3690 ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means | |
3691 apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a | |
3692 nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at | |
3693 position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels | |
3694 around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the | |
3695 neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the | |
3696 transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at | |
3697 x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown | |
3698 below. | |
3699 | |
3700 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1 | |
3701 x-1/y x/y x+1/y | |
3702 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1) | |
3703 | |
3704 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color | |
3705 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels, | |
3706 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum | |
3707 of the factors' absolute values. | |
3708 | |
31858
269d69b69fe4
Update hideshow.el section.
Thien-Thi Nguyen <ttn@gnuvola.org>
parents:
31827
diff
changeset
|
3709 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of |
31636 | 3710 |
3711 (1 0 0 | |
3712 0 0 0 | |
3713 9 9 -1) | |
3714 | |
3715 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of | |
3716 | |
3717 ( 2 -1 0 | |
3718 -1 0 1 | |
3719 0 1 -2) | |
3720 | |
31728 | 3721 ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks |
3722 ``disabled''. | |
3723 | |
31636 | 3724 `:mask MASK' |
3725 | |
3726 If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for | |
3727 the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the | |
3728 image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the | |
3729 background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the | |
35680 | 3730 image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is |
31636 | 3731 the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED |
3732 GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the | |
3733 image. | |
3734 | |
3735 If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images | |
3736 in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying | |
3737 `:mask nil'. | |
25853 | 3738 |
3739 `:file FILE' | |
3740 | |
3741 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, | |
3742 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support | |
3743 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property | |
3744 may be present in the image specification. | |
3745 | |
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3746 `:data DATA' |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3747 |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3748 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3749 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3750 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3751 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. |
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3752 |
25853 | 3753 *** Supported image types |
3754 | |
26034 | 3755 **** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
25853 | 3756 |
3757 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image | |
3758 properties supported are | |
3759 | |
3760 `:foreground FG' | |
3761 | |
3762 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default | |
3763 is the frame's foreground. | |
3764 | |
32572 | 3765 `:background BG' |
25853 | 3766 |
3767 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is | |
3768 the frame's background color. | |
3769 | |
3770 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this | |
3771 case, the image specification must contain the following properties | |
3772 instead of a `:file' property. | |
3773 | |
3774 `:width WIDTH' | |
3775 | |
3776 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. | |
3777 | |
3778 `:height HEIGHT' | |
3779 | |
3780 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. | |
3781 | |
3782 `:data DATA' | |
3783 | |
3784 DATA must be either | |
3785 | |
3786 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must | |
3787 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT | |
3788 | |
3789 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT | |
3790 | |
3791 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the | |
3792 bitmap. | |
3793 | |
28748 | 3794 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor |
3795 height may be specified in this case because these are defined | |
3796 in the file. | |
3797 | |
25853 | 3798 **** XPM, image type `xpm' |
3799 | |
3800 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package | |
3801 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is | |
3802 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via | |
3803 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. | |
3804 | |
3805 Additional image properties supported are: | |
3806 | |
3807 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS' | |
3808 | |
3809 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the | |
3810 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color | |
3811 name. | |
3812 | |
3813 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, | |
3814 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. | |
3815 | |
3816 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able | |
3817 to display compressed images. | |
3818 | |
3819 **** PBM, image type `pbm' | |
3820 | |
3821 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and | |
32551
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3822 mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3823 mono images are |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3824 |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3825 `:foreground FG' |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3826 |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3827 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3828 is the frame's foreground. |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3829 |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3830 `:background FG' |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3831 |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3832 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is |
329cbf266d5c
Add description of :foreground and :background to PBM images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
32511
diff
changeset
|
3833 the frame's background color. |
25853 | 3834 |
3835 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg' | |
3836 | |
3837 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', | |
27055 | 3838 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties |
3839 are: | |
3840 | |
25853 | 3841 **** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
3842 | |
3843 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', | |
3844 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
3845 properties defined. | |
3846 | |
3847 **** GIF, image type `gif' | |
3848 | |
3849 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package | |
3850 `libungif-4.1.0', or later. | |
3851 | |
3852 Additional image properties supported are: | |
3853 | |
3854 `:index INDEX' | |
3855 | |
3856 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a | |
35680 | 3857 multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large. |
25853 | 3858 |
3859 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. | |
3860 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file | |
3861 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images | |
3862 every 0.1 seconds. | |
3863 | |
3864 (defun show-anim (file max) | |
3865 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." | |
3866 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) | |
3867 | |
3868 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) | |
3869 (when (= idx max) | |
3870 (setq idx 0)) | |
27076
40c18bc759e9
Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27055
diff
changeset
|
3871 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
25853 | 3872 (save-excursion |
3873 (set-buffer buffer) | |
3874 (goto-char (point-min)) | |
3875 (unless first-time (delete-char 1)) | |
3876 (insert-image img "x")) | |
3877 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) | |
3878 | |
3879 **** PNG, image type `png' | |
3880 | |
3881 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', | |
3882 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image | |
3883 properties defined. | |
3884 | |
3885 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. | |
3886 | |
3887 Additional image properties supported are: | |
3888 | |
3889 `:pt-width WIDTH' | |
3890 | |
3891 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an | |
26034 | 3892 integer. This is a required property. |
25853 | 3893 |
3894 `:pt-height HEIGHT' | |
3895 | |
3896 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT | |
26034 | 3897 must be a integer. This is an required property. |
25853 | 3898 |
3899 `:bounding-box BOX' | |
3900 | |
3901 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of | |
3902 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS | |
3903 files. This is an required property. | |
3904 | |
3905 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See | |
3906 lisp/gs.el. | |
3907 | |
3908 *** Lisp interface. | |
3909 | |
26264 | 3910 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
3911 which are supported in the current configuration. | |
25853 | 3912 |
3913 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when | |
3914 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. | |
3915 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache | |
28759 | 3916 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all |
3917 images with `equal' specifications share the same image. | |
25853 | 3918 |
3919 *** Simplified image API, image.el | |
3920 | |
3921 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image | |
3922 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' | |
3923 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to | |
3924 define an image based on available image types. The functions | |
3925 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a | |
3926 buffer. | |
3927 | |
3928 +++ | |
3929 ** Display margins. | |
3930 | |
3931 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text | |
3932 and images. | |
3933 | |
3934 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables | |
3935 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call | |
3936 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to | |
3937 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and | |
3938 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | |
3939 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | |
3940 of the display margins. | |
3941 | |
3942 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property | |
3943 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is | |
3944 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a | |
3945 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later | |
3946 in this file). | |
3947 | |
3948 +++ | |
3949 ** Help display | |
3950 | |
3951 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse | |
3952 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property | |
3953 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line | |
3954 that have a `help-echo' property. | |
3955 | |
30219 | 3956 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function |
30305 | 3957 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is |
30372 | 3958 the window in which the help was found. |
3959 | |
3960 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the | |
3961 `help-echo' text property was found. | |
3962 | |
3963 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and | |
3964 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse. | |
3965 | |
3966 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with | |
30467
26afdae5ea13
--disable-largefile, 64-bit solaris
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30445
diff
changeset
|
3967 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the |
30372 | 3968 mouse. |
30219 | 3969 |
3970 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a | |
3971 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string. | |
3972 | |
3973 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to | |
3974 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a | |
3975 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string. | |
3976 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is | |
3977 used as help string. | |
25853 | 3978 |
3979 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays | |
30339
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
3980 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window |
70d759570f7a
C-down-mouse-3. Move concat change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30319
diff
changeset
|
3981 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. |
25853 | 3982 |
3983 +++ | |
3984 ** Vertical fractional scrolling. | |
3985 | |
3986 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. | |
3987 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. | |
3988 | |
3989 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical | |
3990 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. | |
3991 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical | |
3992 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be | |
3993 used. | |
3994 | |
26264 | 3995 (global-set-key [A-down] |
3996 #'(lambda () | |
25853 | 3997 (interactive) |
26264 | 3998 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
25853 | 3999 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
26264 | 4000 (global-set-key [A-up] |
25853 | 4001 #'(lambda () |
4002 (interactive) | |
26264 | 4003 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
25853 | 4004 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
4005 | |
4006 +++ | |
4007 ** New hook `fontification-functions'. | |
4008 | |
4009 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay | |
4010 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This | |
4011 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function | |
4012 is called with one argument, POS. | |
4013 | |
4014 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more | |
4015 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them | |
4016 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text | |
4017 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the | |
4018 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. | |
4019 | |
4020 +++ | |
4021 ** Tool bar support. | |
4022 | |
4023 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame | |
4024 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") | |
4025 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value | |
4026 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and | |
4027 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed | |
4028 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. | |
4029 | |
4030 *** Tool bar item definitions | |
4031 | |
4032 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | |
4033 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' | |
4034 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. | |
26264 | 4035 |
25853 | 4036 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
4037 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in | |
4038 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' | |
4039 property (see below). | |
26264 | 4040 |
25853 | 4041 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
4042 binding are currently ignored. | |
4043 | |
4044 The following properties are recognized: | |
4045 | |
4046 `:enable FORM'. | |
26264 | 4047 |
25853 | 4048 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
4049 or disabled. | |
26264 | 4050 |
25853 | 4051 `:visible FORM' |
26264 | 4052 |
25853 | 4053 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
26264 | 4054 |
25853 | 4055 `:filter FUNCTION' |
4056 | |
4057 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which | |
4058 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is | |
4059 used instead of BINDING to display this item. | |
26264 | 4060 |
25853 | 4061 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
4062 | |
4063 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated | |
4064 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. | |
26264 | 4065 |
25853 | 4066 `:image IMAGES' |
4067 | |
4068 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four | |
4069 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the | |
4070 meaning of each of the four elements: | |
4071 | |
4072 Index Use when item is | |
4073 ---------------------------------------- | |
4074 0 enabled and selected | |
4075 1 enabled and deselected | |
4076 2 disabled and selected | |
4077 3 disabled and deselected | |
26264 | 4078 |
28946 | 4079 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection |
4080 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state. | |
4081 | |
25853 | 4082 `:help HELP-STRING'. |
26264 | 4083 |
25853 | 4084 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
4085 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. | |
4086 | |
31641 | 4087 The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding |
31741 | 4088 toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used |
4089 to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the | |
4090 menu bar. | |
31641 | 4091 |
33484 | 4092 The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar |
4093 dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set | |
4094 buffer-locally to override the global map. | |
4095 | |
25853 | 4096 *** Tool-bar-related variables. |
4097 | |
4098 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically | |
4099 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger | |
4100 than 1/4 of the frame's size. | |
4101 | |
26264 | 4102 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
25853 | 4103 raised when the mouse moves over them. |
4104 | |
4105 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting | |
4106 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of | |
35278 | 4107 pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and |
4108 vertical margins . Default is 1. | |
25853 | 4109 |
4110 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting | |
4111 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. | |
4112 | |
4113 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. | |
4114 | |
4115 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on | |
26264 | 4116 a tool bar item. If |
25853 | 4117 |
4118 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] | |
4119 '(menu-item "Shell" shell | |
4120 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) | |
4121 | |
4122 is the original tool bar item definition, then | |
4123 | |
4124 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) | |
4125 | |
4126 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same | |
4127 item. | |
4128 | |
4129 ** Mode line changes. | |
4130 | |
4131 +++ | |
4132 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line. | |
4133 | |
4134 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there | |
4135 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display | |
4136 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. | |
4137 | |
4138 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has | |
4139 a `local-map' text property. | |
4140 | |
4141 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and | |
4142 that format specifier has a `local-map' property. | |
4143 | |
4144 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM | |
4145 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a | |
4146 `local-map' property. | |
4147 | |
4148 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' | |
4149 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an | |
4150 example. | |
4151 | |
26359
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
4152 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
4153 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. |
d2970b5d3b72
Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26322
diff
changeset
|
4154 |
25853 | 4155 +++ |
4156 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local | |
4157 variable mode-line-format to nil. | |
4158 | |
4159 +++ | |
4160 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. | |
4161 | |
4162 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable | |
4163 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are | |
4164 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and | |
4165 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top | |
4166 line. | |
4167 | |
4168 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face | |
4169 `header-line'. | |
4170 | |
4171 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a | |
4172 position in the header-line. | |
4173 | |
4174 +++ | |
4175 ** Text property `display' | |
4176 | |
31827 | 4177 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, |
4178 replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is | |
4179 also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of | |
4180 the `display' property should be a display specification, as described | |
25853 | 4181 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. |
4182 | |
31827 | 4183 *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas |
4184 | |
4185 To replace the text having the `display' property with some other | |
4186 text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'. | |
4187 | |
4188 If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left | |
4189 marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in | |
4190 the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING | |
4191 is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
4192 simpler form STRING as property value. | |
4193 | |
25853 | 4194 *** Variable width and height spaces |
4195 | |
4196 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display | |
4197 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is | |
4198 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal | |
4199 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right | |
4200 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is | |
4201 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the | |
4202 simpler form STRETCH as property value. | |
4203 | |
4204 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space | |
4205 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the | |
4206 properties described below. | |
4207 | |
4208 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the | |
4209 characters having the `display' property. | |
4210 | |
4211 - :width WIDTH | |
4212 | |
4213 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal | |
4214 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. | |
4215 | |
4216 - :relative-width FACTOR | |
4217 | |
4218 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the | |
4219 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the | |
4220 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the | |
4221 width of that character by FACTOR. | |
4222 | |
4223 - :align-to HPOS | |
4224 | |
4225 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The | |
4226 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. | |
4227 | |
4228 Exactly one of the above properties should be used. | |
4229 | |
4230 - :height HEIGHT | |
4231 | |
4232 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the | |
4233 normal line height. | |
4234 | |
4235 - :relative-height FACTOR | |
4236 | |
4237 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height | |
4238 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. | |
4239 | |
4240 - :ascent ASCENT | |
4241 | |
4242 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be | |
4243 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the | |
4244 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or | |
4245 equal to 100. | |
4246 | |
4247 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. | |
4248 | |
4249 *** Images | |
4250 | |
4251 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION | |
4252 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, | |
4253 in the display, the characters having this display specification in | |
4254 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', | |
4255 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is | |
4256 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal | |
4257 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in | |
4258 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE | |
4259 as display specification. | |
4260 | |
4261 *** Other display properties | |
4262 | |
33499 | 4263 - (space-width FACTOR) |
25853 | 4264 |
4265 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property | |
4266 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an | |
4267 integer or float. | |
4268 | |
33499 | 4269 - (height HEIGHT) |
25853 | 4270 |
4271 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. | |
4272 | |
4273 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that | |
4274 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of | |
4275 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A | |
4276 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which | |
4277 a font is available counts as a step. | |
4278 | |
4279 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times | |
4280 as tall as the frame's default font. | |
4281 | |
4282 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current | |
4283 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. | |
4284 | |
4285 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol | |
4286 `height' bound to the current specified font height. | |
4287 | |
33499 | 4288 - (raise FACTOR) |
25853 | 4289 |
4290 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current | |
4291 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters | |
4292 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The | |
4293 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the | |
33499 | 4294 `height' subproperty. |
25853 | 4295 |
4296 *** Conditional display properties | |
4297 | |
4298 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification | |
4299 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC | |
4300 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. | |
35680 | 4301 During evaluation, point is temporarily set to the end position of |
25853 | 4302 the text having the `display' property. |
4303 | |
4304 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to | |
4305 `(:when t SPEC)'. | |
4306 | |
4307 +++ | |
4308 ** New menu separator types. | |
4309 | |
4310 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with | |
4311 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are | |
4312 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used | |
4313 to specify other menu separator types. | |
4314 | |
4315 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' | |
4316 | |
4317 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the | |
4318 separator occurs. | |
4319 | |
4320 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' | |
4321 | |
4322 A single line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4323 | |
4324 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' | |
4325 | |
4326 A double line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4327 | |
4328 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' | |
4329 | |
4330 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4331 | |
4332 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' | |
4333 | |
4334 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. | |
4335 | |
4336 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' | |
4337 | |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
4338 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form |
25853 | 4339 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. |
4340 | |
4341 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' | |
4342 | |
4343 A single line with 3D raised appearance. | |
4344 | |
4345 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' | |
4346 | |
4347 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. | |
4348 | |
4349 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' | |
4350 | |
4351 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. | |
4352 | |
4353 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' | |
4354 | |
4355 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
4356 | |
4357 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' | |
4358 | |
4359 Two lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
4360 | |
4361 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' | |
4362 | |
4363 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. | |
4364 | |
4365 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' | |
4366 | |
4367 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. | |
4368 | |
4369 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like | |
4370 the corresponding single-line separators. | |
4371 | |
4372 +++ | |
4373 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. | |
4374 | |
4375 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and | |
4376 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. | |
4377 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify | |
4378 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, | |
4379 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the | |
4380 default background is the background color of the frame, and the | |
4381 default foreground is black. | |
4382 | |
4383 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' | |
4384 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class | |
4385 `ScrollBarBackground'). | |
4386 | |
4387 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource | |
4388 settings for scroll bar colors. | |
4389 | |
4390 +++ | |
4391 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent | |
4392 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. | |
4393 | |
4394 --- | |
4395 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it | |
4396 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based | |
4397 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued | |
4398 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from | |
4399 the original window start. | |
4400 | |
4401 --- | |
4402 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions | |
4403 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed | |
4404 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. | |
4405 | |
4406 +++ | |
4407 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. | |
4408 | |
4409 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable | |
4410 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes | |
4411 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any | |
4412 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
4413 | |
4414 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer | |
4415 fixed-width and fixed-height. | |
4416 | |
4417 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) | |
4418 | |
4419 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is | |
4420 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the | |
4421 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To | |
4422 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' | |
4423 temporarily to nil, for example | |
4424 | |
4425 (let ((window-size-fixed nil)) | |
4426 (enlarge-window 10)) | |
4427 | |
26264 | 4428 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
25853 | 4429 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
28094
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4430 |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4431 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4432 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4433 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4434 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4435 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't |
e1e48e0663f6
Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28063
diff
changeset
|
4436 support a vertical-bar cursor). |
30786 | 4437 |
30922 | 4438 |
35469 | 4439 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
4440 |
30922 | 4441 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes |
4442 | |
4443 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard | |
4444 input. | |
4445 | |
4446 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos. | |
4447 | |
4448 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages. | |
4449 | |
4450 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not | |
4451 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The | |
4452 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets | |
4453 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence | |
4454 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search. | |
4455 | |
4456 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has | |
4457 been added. | |
4458 | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
4459 |
30922 | 4460 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change |
4461 | |
4462 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added. | |
4463 | |
35469 | 4464 |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
4465 |
30922 | 4466 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
4467 | |
4468 ** Not new, but not mentioned before: | |
4469 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
4470 |
30922 | 4471 * Changes in Emacs 20.4 |
4472 | |
4473 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el. | |
4474 | |
4475 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. | |
4476 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name | |
4477 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. | |
4478 | |
4479 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file | |
4480 is the one that is used. | |
4481 | |
4482 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return | |
4483 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). | |
4484 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, | |
4485 separate from the command's regular output. | |
4486 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer | |
4487 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. | |
4488 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies | |
4489 the buffer name. | |
4490 | |
4491 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error | |
4492 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate | |
4493 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not | |
4494 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. | |
4495 | |
4496 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in | |
4497 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, | |
4498 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers | |
4499 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. | |
4500 | |
4501 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For | |
4502 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names | |
4503 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the | |
4504 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. | |
4505 | |
4506 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches | |
4507 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: | |
4508 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then | |
4509 they never ignore case. | |
4510 | |
4511 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned | |
4512 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually | |
4513 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents | |
4514 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or | |
4515 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs | |
4516 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a | |
4517 part of the general feature of coding system conversion. | |
4518 | |
4519 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to | |
4520 the same format that was used in the file before. | |
4521 | |
4522 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable | |
4523 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. | |
4524 | |
4525 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been | |
4526 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. | |
4527 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. | |
4528 | |
4529 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. | |
4530 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a | |
4531 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for | |
4532 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format | |
4533 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual | |
4534 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for | |
4535 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). | |
4536 | |
4537 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, | |
4538 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, | |
4539 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line | |
4540 format. You can now customize these variables. | |
4541 | |
4542 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a | |
4543 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a | |
4544 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of | |
4545 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. | |
4546 | |
4547 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode | |
4548 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given | |
4549 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. | |
4550 | |
4551 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function | |
4552 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file | |
4553 doesn't have any effect. | |
4554 | |
4555 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, | |
4556 not one per buffer. | |
4557 | |
4558 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to | |
4559 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: | |
4560 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) | |
4561 | |
4562 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. | |
4563 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the | |
4564 `auto-show-mode' command. | |
4565 | |
4566 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to | |
4567 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous | |
4568 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font | |
4569 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change | |
4570 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. | |
4571 | |
4572 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's | |
4573 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. | |
4574 | |
4575 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the | |
4576 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this | |
4577 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. | |
4578 | |
4579 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at | |
4580 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an | |
4581 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode | |
4582 and variable specification, as well as on the first line. | |
4583 | |
4584 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. | |
4585 | |
4586 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system | |
4587 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and | |
4588 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that | |
4589 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character | |
4590 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. | |
4591 | |
4592 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates | |
4593 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. | |
4594 | |
4595 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have | |
4596 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to | |
4597 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to | |
4598 `?' on other systems. | |
4599 | |
4600 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this | |
4601 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on | |
4602 Unix. | |
4603 | |
4604 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the | |
4605 current codepage when it starts. | |
4606 | |
4607 ** Mail changes | |
4608 | |
4609 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if | |
4610 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', | |
4611 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if | |
4612 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other | |
4613 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three | |
4614 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is | |
4615 latin-1: | |
4616 | |
4617 MIME-version: 1.0 | |
4618 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 | |
4619 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit | |
4620 | |
4621 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the | |
4622 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than | |
4623 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than | |
4624 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of | |
4625 buffer-file-coding-system. | |
4626 | |
4627 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set | |
4628 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing | |
4629 mail. | |
4630 | |
4631 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, | |
4632 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, | |
4633 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a | |
4634 list of possible coding systems. | |
4635 | |
4636 ** CC Mode changes | |
4637 | |
4638 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major | |
4639 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no | |
4640 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's | |
4641 docstring for details. | |
4642 | |
4643 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic | |
4644 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is | |
4645 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a | |
4646 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied | |
4647 lineup functions use this feature currently. | |
4648 | |
4649 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and | |
4650 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. | |
4651 | |
4652 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for | |
4653 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. | |
4654 | |
4655 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately | |
4656 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new | |
4657 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on | |
4658 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for | |
4659 anonymous classes. | |
4660 | |
4661 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific | |
4662 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont | |
4663 | |
4664 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol | |
4665 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike | |
4666 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup | |
4667 function c-lineup-inexpr-block. | |
4668 | |
4669 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists | |
4670 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open | |
4671 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. | |
4672 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces | |
4673 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). | |
4674 | |
4675 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. | |
4676 | |
4677 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. | |
4678 | |
4679 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) | |
4680 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. | |
4681 | |
4682 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. | |
4683 | |
4684 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation | |
4685 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. | |
4686 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some | |
4687 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the | |
4688 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). | |
4689 | |
4690 ** Gnus changes. | |
4691 | |
4692 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been | |
4693 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the | |
4694 Gnus manual for the full story. | |
4695 | |
4696 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than | |
4697 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft | |
4698 group, which is created automatically. | |
4699 | |
4700 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header | |
4701 values. | |
4702 | |
4703 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. | |
4704 | |
4705 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message | |
4706 outside the region: `C-c C-v'. | |
4707 | |
4708 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with | |
4709 `C-u C-c C-c'. | |
4710 | |
4711 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. | |
4712 | |
4713 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit | |
4714 re-highlighting of the article buffer. | |
4715 | |
4716 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. | |
4717 | |
4718 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic | |
4719 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. | |
4720 | |
4721 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix | |
4722 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. | |
4723 | |
4724 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater | |
4725 control over simplification. | |
4726 | |
4727 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. | |
4728 | |
4729 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the | |
4730 limit. | |
4731 | |
4732 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. | |
4733 | |
4734 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. | |
4735 | |
4736 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. | |
4737 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must | |
4738 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. | |
4739 | |
35680 | 4740 *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix |
30922 | 4741 `a' forces normal posting method. |
4742 | |
4743 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text | |
4744 -- `W d'. | |
4745 | |
4746 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' | |
4747 to a non-nil value. | |
4748 | |
4749 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling | |
4750 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. | |
4751 | |
4752 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer | |
4753 has been added. | |
4754 | |
4755 *** A history of where mails have been split is available. | |
4756 | |
4757 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. | |
4758 | |
4759 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting | |
4760 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'. | |
4761 | |
4762 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- | |
4763 `message-cite-original-without-signature'. | |
4764 | |
4765 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. | |
4766 | |
4767 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has | |
4768 been added. | |
4769 | |
4770 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the | |
4771 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. | |
4772 | |
4773 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually | |
4774 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. | |
4775 | |
4776 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. | |
4777 | |
4778 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. | |
4779 | |
4780 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. | |
4781 | |
4782 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode | |
4783 | |
4784 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give | |
4785 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in | |
4786 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". | |
4787 | |
4788 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a | |
4789 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some | |
4790 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run | |
4791 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you | |
4792 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. | |
4793 | |
4794 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. | |
4795 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available | |
4796 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use | |
4797 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. | |
4798 | |
4799 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check | |
4800 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* | |
4801 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular | |
4802 mismatch. | |
4803 | |
4804 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
4805 | |
4806 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and | |
4807 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. | |
4808 | |
4809 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now | |
4810 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 | |
4811 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be | |
4812 removed from the label. | |
4813 | |
4814 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use | |
4815 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. | |
4816 | |
4817 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the | |
4818 customization group `reftex-finding-files'. | |
4819 | |
4820 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to | |
4821 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular | |
4822 expressions. | |
4823 | |
4824 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. | |
4825 | |
4826 ** New/deleted modes and packages | |
4827 | |
4828 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and | |
4829 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
4830 | |
4831 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for | |
4832 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with | |
4833 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. | |
4834 | |
4835 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer | |
4836 changes with a special face. | |
4837 | |
4838 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and | |
4839 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use | |
4840 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
4841 |
30922 | 4842 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 |
4843 | |
4844 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. | |
4845 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, | |
4846 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, | |
4847 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, | |
4848 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. | |
4849 | |
4850 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds | |
4851 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim | |
4852 distribution when the config.bat script is run. | |
4853 | |
4854 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on | |
4855 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it | |
4856 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written | |
4857 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of | |
4858 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing | |
4859 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a | |
4860 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external | |
4861 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of | |
4862 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) | |
4863 | |
4864 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript | |
4865 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs | |
4866 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard | |
4867 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a | |
4868 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external | |
4869 program. | |
4870 | |
4871 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, | |
4872 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these | |
4873 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax | |
4874 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name | |
4875 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is | |
4876 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. | |
4877 | |
4878 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has | |
4879 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on | |
4880 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but | |
4881 was not documented clearly before. | |
4882 | |
4883 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. | |
4884 This includes Tetris and Snake. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
4885 |
30922 | 4886 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 |
4887 | |
4888 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position | |
4889 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. | |
4890 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same | |
4891 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. | |
4892 | |
4893 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument | |
4894 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, | |
4895 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. | |
4896 | |
4897 ** Changes in the file-attributes function. | |
4898 | |
4899 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. | |
4900 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. | |
4901 | |
4902 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
4903 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two | |
4904 integers. | |
4905 | |
4906 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of | |
4907 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same | |
4908 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that | |
4909 file names and attributes are returned. | |
4910 | |
4911 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for | |
4912 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It | |
35680 | 4913 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes. |
30922 | 4914 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and |
4915 returns the result. | |
4916 | |
4917 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern | |
4918 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. | |
4919 | |
4920 ** New functions for base64 conversion: | |
4921 | |
4922 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer | |
4923 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region | |
4924 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported | |
4925 optionally. | |
4926 | |
4927 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar | |
4928 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. | |
4929 | |
4930 ** | |
4931 The new function process-running-child-p | |
4932 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its | |
4933 terminal to its own child process. | |
4934 | |
4935 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: | |
4936 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal | |
4937 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell | |
4938 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. | |
4939 | |
4940 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can | |
4941 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. | |
4942 | |
4943 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. | |
4944 :included is an alias for :visible. | |
4945 | |
4946 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by | |
4947 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used | |
4948 to move or copy menu entries. | |
4949 | |
4950 ** Multibyte editing changes | |
4951 | |
4952 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is | |
4953 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to | |
4954 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also | |
4955 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and | |
4956 char-bytes in a loop typically as below: | |
4957 (setq char (sref str idx) | |
4958 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) | |
4959 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. | |
4960 | |
4961 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character | |
4962 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: | |
4963 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) | |
4964 | |
4965 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the | |
4966 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or | |
4967 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: | |
4968 | |
35680 | 4969 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited |
30922 | 4970 |
4971 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character | |
4972 across the boundary. | |
4973 | |
4974 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include | |
4975 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: | |
4976 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and | |
4977 contains 8-bit characters. | |
4978 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and | |
4979 contains invalid characters. | |
4980 | |
4981 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove | |
4982 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly | |
4983 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing | |
4984 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct | |
4985 way. | |
4986 | |
4987 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. | |
4988 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of | |
4989 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by | |
4990 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. | |
4991 | |
4992 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly | |
4993 compose Thai characters in a string. | |
4994 | |
4995 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third | |
4996 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name | |
4997 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as | |
4998 menus should always use the third argument. | |
4999 | |
5000 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, | |
5001 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second | |
5002 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current | |
5003 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. | |
5004 | |
5005 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents | |
5006 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in | |
5007 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing | |
5008 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. | |
5009 | |
5010 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in | |
5011 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it | |
5012 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous | |
5013 echo area contents. | |
5014 | |
5015 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) | |
5016 | |
5017 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument | |
5018 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the | |
5019 requested feature cannot be loaded. | |
5020 | |
5021 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the | |
5022 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern | |
5023 means to clear out that attribute. | |
5024 | |
5025 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame | |
5026 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. | |
5027 | |
5028 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now | |
5029 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode | |
5030 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the | |
5031 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. | |
5032 | |
5033 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on | |
5034 the gap of the current buffer. | |
5035 | |
5036 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way | |
5037 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the | |
5038 current buffer. | |
5039 | |
5040 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to | |
5041 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. | |
5042 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check | |
5043 it back in after any modifications have been made. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
5044 |
30922 | 5045 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
5046 | |
5047 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of | |
5048 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and | |
5049 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those | |
5050 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and | |
5051 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. | |
5052 | |
5053 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose | |
5054 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. | |
5055 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory | |
5056 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use | |
5057 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. | |
5058 | |
5059 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it | |
5060 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each | |
5061 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. | |
5062 | |
5063 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs | |
5064 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically | |
5065 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the | |
5066 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a | |
5067 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired | |
5068 results. | |
5069 | |
5070 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from | |
5071 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers | |
5072 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in | |
5073 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
5074 |
30922 | 5075 * Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
5076 | |
5077 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command | |
5078 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, | |
5079 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can | |
5080 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. | |
5081 | |
5082 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a | |
5083 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired | |
5084 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing | |
5085 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo | |
5086 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made | |
5087 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them | |
5088 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that | |
5089 region. | |
5090 | |
5091 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests | |
5092 selective undo. | |
5093 | |
5094 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are | |
5095 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte | |
5096 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same | |
5097 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs | |
5098 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. | |
5099 | |
5100 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, | |
5101 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use | |
5102 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to | |
5103 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
5104 | |
5105 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and | |
5106 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the | |
5107 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is | |
5108 something that most users not do. | |
5109 | |
5110 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste | |
5111 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. | |
5112 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other | |
5113 applications. | |
5114 | |
5115 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and | |
5116 pasting operations. | |
5117 | |
5118 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by | |
5119 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks | |
5120 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different | |
5121 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting | |
5122 `ps-printer-name'. | |
5123 | |
5124 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a | |
5125 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember | |
5126 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it | |
5127 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting | |
5128 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor | |
5129 hits a new word. | |
5130 | |
5131 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for | |
5132 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not | |
5133 to be confused by TeX commands. | |
5134 | |
5135 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something | |
5136 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by | |
5137 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu | |
5138 of various alternative replacements and actions. | |
5139 | |
5140 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces | |
5141 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several | |
5142 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in | |
5143 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if | |
5144 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. | |
5145 | |
5146 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if | |
5147 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. | |
5148 | |
5149 ** Changes in input method usage. | |
5150 | |
5151 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among | |
5152 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p | |
5153 respectively. | |
5154 | |
5155 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. | |
5156 | |
5157 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one | |
5158 of the alternatives with Mouse-2. | |
5159 | |
5160 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so | |
5161 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. | |
5162 | |
5163 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. | |
5164 | |
5165 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. | |
5166 | |
5167 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only | |
5168 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. | |
5169 | |
5170 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is | |
5171 given in the following case: | |
5172 o When you are using a complex input method. | |
5173 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. | |
5174 | |
5175 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting | |
5176 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, | |
5177 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, | |
5178 setting it to t is helpful. | |
5179 | |
5180 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. | |
5181 | |
5182 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following | |
5183 keys: | |
5184 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method | |
5185 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc | |
5186 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja | |
5187 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language | |
5188 environment. | |
5189 | |
5190 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file | |
5191 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the | |
5192 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to | |
5193 get | |
5194 | |
5195 /usr/foo//etc/passwd | |
5196 | |
5197 which stands for the file /etc/passwd. | |
5198 | |
5199 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. | |
5200 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. | |
5201 | |
5202 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t | |
5203 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve | |
5204 its owner and group. | |
5205 | |
5206 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs | |
5207 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. | |
5208 | |
5209 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle | |
5210 contents before inserting the specified string on each line. | |
5211 | |
5212 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle | |
5213 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column | |
5214 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified | |
5215 by the left edge of the rectangle. | |
5216 | |
5217 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, | |
5218 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit | |
5219 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful | |
5220 for writing keyboard macros. | |
5221 | |
5222 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, | |
5223 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The | |
5224 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as | |
5225 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define | |
5226 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and | |
5227 info. | |
5228 | |
5229 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. | |
5230 | |
5231 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x | |
5232 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region | |
5233 contents only. | |
5234 | |
5235 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for | |
5236 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call | |
5237 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM | |
5238 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. | |
5239 | |
5240 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited | |
5241 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file | |
5242 literally. If you say no, it signals an error. | |
5243 | |
5244 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature | |
5245 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. | |
5246 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is | |
5247 inconsistent with Emacs conventions. | |
5248 | |
5249 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or | |
5250 failure if the command produces no output. | |
5251 | |
5252 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window | |
5253 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move | |
5254 the mouse. | |
5255 | |
5256 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to | |
5257 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related | |
5258 function and variable names. | |
5259 | |
5260 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for | |
5261 reading specific files. This has higher priority than | |
5262 file-coding-system-alist. | |
5263 | |
5264 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to | |
5265 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by | |
5266 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to | |
5267 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed | |
5268 according to the current fontset. | |
5269 | |
5270 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. | |
5271 | |
5272 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of | |
5273 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and | |
5274 nonascii-insert-offset. | |
5275 | |
5276 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if | |
5277 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table | |
5278 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte | |
5279 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. | |
5280 | |
5281 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get | |
5282 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. | |
5283 | |
5284 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case | |
5285 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. | |
5286 | |
5287 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables | |
5288 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant | |
5289 command keys. | |
5290 | |
5291 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for | |
5292 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. | |
5293 | |
5294 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for | |
5295 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at | |
5296 all variables that have documentation. | |
5297 | |
5298 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer | |
5299 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way | |
5300 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable | |
5301 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap | |
5302 it should show; the default is 20. | |
5303 | |
5304 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, | |
5305 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole | |
5306 of your input. | |
5307 | |
5308 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize | |
5309 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in | |
5310 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as | |
5311 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all | |
5312 the customizable options which were changed since that version. | |
5313 Newly added options are included as well. | |
5314 | |
5315 If you don't specify a particular version number argument, | |
5316 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options | |
5317 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. | |
5318 | |
5319 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the | |
5320 Customize menu. | |
5321 | |
5322 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out | |
5323 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. | |
5324 | |
5325 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of | |
5326 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were | |
5327 invoked. | |
5328 | |
5329 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces | |
5330 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. | |
5331 The default is 1. | |
5332 | |
5333 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol | |
5334 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has | |
5335 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram | |
5336 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block | |
5337 sensibly. | |
5338 | |
5339 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. | |
5340 | |
5341 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil | |
5342 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make | |
5343 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. | |
5344 | |
5345 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a | |
5346 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string | |
5347 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically | |
5348 every night. | |
5349 | |
5350 ** Desktop changes | |
5351 | |
5352 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set | |
5353 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. | |
5354 | |
5355 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored | |
5356 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'. | |
5357 | |
5358 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to | |
5359 read and post multi-lingual articles. | |
5360 | |
5361 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when | |
5362 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should | |
5363 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden | |
5364 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and | |
5365 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is | |
5366 made invisible again. | |
5367 | |
5368 ** Mail reading and sending changes | |
5369 | |
5370 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of | |
5371 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any | |
5372 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently | |
5373 toggle. | |
5374 | |
5375 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, | |
5376 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the | |
5377 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if | |
5378 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable | |
5379 rmail-default-body-file. | |
5380 | |
5381 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no | |
5382 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they | |
5383 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. | |
5384 | |
5385 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, | |
5386 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression | |
5387 is evaluated to insert the signature. | |
5388 | |
5389 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of | |
5390 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email | |
5391 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for | |
5392 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for | |
5393 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be | |
5394 especially interested in trying feedmail. | |
5395 | |
5396 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of | |
5397 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features | |
5398 provided by feedmail are: | |
5399 | |
5400 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and | |
5401 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); | |
5402 there is also a queue for draft messages | |
5403 | |
5404 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and | |
5405 be prompted for confirmation | |
5406 | |
5407 **** does smart filling of address headers | |
5408 | |
5409 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be | |
5410 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this | |
5411 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get | |
5412 | |
5413 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting | |
5414 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, | |
5415 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new | |
5416 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) | |
5417 | |
5418 ** Dired changes | |
5419 | |
5420 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked | |
5421 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". | |
5422 | |
5423 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily | |
5424 run Dired on the directory name at point. | |
5425 | |
5426 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of | |
5427 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match | |
5428 for a specified regexp. | |
5429 | |
5430 ** VC Changes | |
5431 | |
5432 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control | |
5433 conveniently. | |
5434 | |
5435 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much | |
5436 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary | |
5437 Dired. | |
5438 | |
5439 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the | |
5440 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive | |
5441 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are | |
5442 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). | |
5443 | |
5444 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, | |
5445 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set | |
5446 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version | |
5447 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' | |
5448 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. | |
5449 | |
5450 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which | |
5451 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type | |
5452 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on | |
5453 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes | |
5454 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. | |
5455 | |
5456 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to | |
5457 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all | |
5458 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, | |
5459 `* l', to mark all files currently locked. | |
5460 | |
5461 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in | |
5462 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls | |
5463 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. | |
5464 | |
5465 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working | |
5466 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff | |
5467 session to resolve them. | |
5468 | |
5469 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to | |
5470 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that | |
5471 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS | |
5472 uses as well). | |
5473 | |
5474 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new | |
5475 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When | |
5476 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify | |
5477 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that | |
5478 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. | |
5479 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, | |
5480 using ediff. | |
5481 | |
5482 ** Changes in Font Lock | |
5483 | |
5484 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face | |
5485 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical | |
5486 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are | |
5487 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for | |
5488 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. | |
5489 | |
5490 ** Frame name display changes | |
5491 | |
5492 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current | |
5493 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and | |
5494 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or | |
5495 when many frames are invisible or iconified. | |
5496 | |
5497 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the | |
5498 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames | |
5499 menu. | |
5500 | |
5501 ** Comint (subshell) changes | |
5502 | |
5503 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a | |
5504 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility | |
5505 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. | |
5506 | |
5507 *** There are new commands in Comint mode. | |
5508 | |
5509 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; | |
5510 that is, the line after the last line you got. | |
5511 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. | |
5512 | |
5513 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to | |
5514 send the current line together with the following line, when you send | |
5515 the following line. | |
5516 | |
5517 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, | |
5518 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the | |
5519 previously sent input. | |
5520 | |
5521 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; | |
5522 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input | |
5523 as the search string. | |
5524 | |
5525 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll | |
5526 automatically in compilation-mode windows. | |
5527 | |
5528 ** C mode changes | |
5529 | |
5530 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, | |
5531 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is | |
5532 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro | |
5533 definition. | |
5534 | |
5535 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified | |
5536 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. | |
5537 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" | |
5538 style is still the default however. | |
5539 | |
5540 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. | |
5541 | |
5542 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which | |
5543 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer | |
5544 them. They do not have key bindings by default. | |
5545 | |
5546 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) | |
5547 and M-e (c-end-of-statement). | |
5548 | |
5549 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols | |
5550 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. | |
5551 | |
5552 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets | |
5553 makes the style variables local to that buffer only. | |
5554 | |
5555 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, | |
5556 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. | |
5557 | |
5558 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You | |
5559 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire | |
5560 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new | |
5561 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. | |
5562 | |
5563 ** Changes to hippie-expand. | |
5564 | |
5565 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If | |
5566 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, | |
5567 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. | |
5568 | |
5569 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If | |
5570 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when | |
5571 expanding dynamically. | |
5572 | |
5573 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If | |
5574 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. | |
5575 | |
5576 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If | |
5577 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in | |
5578 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose | |
5579 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. | |
5580 | |
5581 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. | |
5582 | |
5583 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
5584 | |
5585 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable | |
5586 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during | |
5587 automatic key generation. This replaces variable | |
5588 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches | |
5589 against the first word in the title. | |
5590 | |
5591 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just | |
5592 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, | |
5593 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with | |
5594 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use | |
5595 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the | |
5596 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. | |
5597 | |
5598 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key | |
5599 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is | |
5600 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and | |
5601 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. | |
5602 | |
5603 ** Changes in vcursor.el. | |
5604 | |
5605 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap | |
5606 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A | |
5607 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be | |
5608 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including | |
5609 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency | |
5610 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. | |
5611 | |
5612 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the | |
5613 Editing group once the package is loaded. | |
5614 | |
5615 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is | |
5616 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set | |
35680 | 5617 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior. |
30922 | 5618 |
5619 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the | |
5620 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. | |
5621 | |
5622 ** Ispell changes. | |
5623 | |
5624 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current | |
5625 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings | |
5626 are identified by syntax tables in effect. | |
5627 | |
5628 *** Generic region skipping implemented. | |
5629 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will | |
5630 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user | |
5631 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this | |
5632 include: | |
5633 | |
5634 o URLs are automatically skipped | |
5635 o EMail message checking is vastly improved. | |
5636 | |
5637 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. | |
5638 | |
5639 ** Changes to RefTeX mode | |
5640 | |
5641 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very | |
5642 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been | |
5643 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the | |
5644 section `Optimizations' in the manual. | |
5645 | |
5646 *** New recursive parser. | |
5647 | |
5648 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the | |
5649 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new | |
5650 recursive parser scans the individual files. | |
5651 | |
5652 *** Parsing only part of a document. | |
5653 | |
5654 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling | |
5655 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of | |
5656 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. | |
5657 | |
5658 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
5659 | |
5660 *** Storing parsing information in a file. | |
5661 | |
5662 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use | |
5663 | |
5664 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
5665 | |
5666 *** Using multiple selection buffers | |
5667 | |
5668 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens | |
5669 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting | |
5670 | |
5671 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
5672 | |
5673 *** References to external documents. | |
5674 | |
5675 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external | |
5676 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external | |
5677 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument | |
5678 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with | |
5679 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in | |
5680 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). | |
5681 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. | |
5682 | |
5683 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. | |
5684 | |
35680 | 5685 The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, |
30922 | 5686 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. |
5687 | |
5688 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes | |
5689 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. | |
5690 | |
5691 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers | |
5692 | |
5693 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* | |
5694 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. | |
5695 | |
5696 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. | |
5697 | |
5698 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of | |
5699 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', | |
5700 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes | |
5701 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you | |
5702 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' | |
5703 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out | |
5704 more. | |
5705 | |
5706 *** Support for the varioref package | |
5707 | |
5708 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. | |
5709 | |
5710 *** New hooks | |
5711 | |
5712 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, | |
5713 and citations are created. These hooks are | |
5714 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', | |
5715 `reftex-format-cite-function'. | |
5716 | |
5717 *** Citations outside LaTeX | |
5718 | |
5719 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in | |
5720 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. | |
5721 | |
5722 *** Short context is no longer fontified. | |
5723 | |
5724 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the | |
5725 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be | |
5726 fontified, use | |
5727 | |
5728 (setq reftex-refontify-context t) | |
5729 | |
5730 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. | |
5731 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of | |
5732 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other | |
5733 directories that contain the same file name. | |
5734 | |
5735 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file | |
5736 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary | |
5737 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to | |
5738 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that | |
5739 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer | |
5740 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other | |
5741 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present | |
5742 directory. | |
5743 | |
5744 ** New modes and packages | |
5745 | |
5746 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. | |
5747 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer | |
5748 it, but some do not. | |
5749 | |
5750 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL | |
5751 code. | |
5752 | |
5753 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the | |
5754 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move | |
5755 around in a buffer. | |
5756 | |
5757 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. | |
5758 | |
5759 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author | |
5760 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should | |
5761 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an | |
5762 established system of notation similar to Chess. | |
5763 | |
5764 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp | |
5765 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style | |
5766 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. | |
5767 | |
5768 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features | |
5769 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around | |
5770 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of | |
5771 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also | |
5772 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and | |
5773 the like. | |
5774 | |
5775 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to | |
5776 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. | |
5777 | |
5778 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done | |
5779 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not | |
5780 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize | |
5781 the user option `midnight-mode' to t. | |
5782 | |
5783 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. | |
5784 | |
5785 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files | |
5786 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files | |
5787 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files | |
5788 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files | |
5789 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) | |
5790 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files | |
5791 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files | |
5792 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files | |
5793 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files | |
5794 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files | |
5795 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files | |
5796 | |
5797 Platform-specific modes: | |
5798 | |
5799 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files | |
5800 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files | |
5801 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files | |
5802 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files | |
5803 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files | |
5804 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files | |
5805 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts | |
5806 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files | |
5807 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
5808 |
30922 | 5809 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
5810 | |
5811 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, | |
5812 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. | |
5813 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. | |
5814 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. | |
5815 | |
5816 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether | |
5817 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives | |
5818 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. | |
5819 | |
5820 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, | |
5821 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can | |
5822 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for | |
5823 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. | |
5824 | |
5825 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and | |
5826 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte | |
5827 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language | |
5828 environment. | |
5829 | |
5830 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now | |
5831 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt | |
5832 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the | |
5833 current input method for reading this one event. | |
5834 | |
5835 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte | |
5836 now control whether to output certain characters as | |
5837 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte | |
5838 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte | |
5839 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing | |
5840 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
5841 |
30922 | 5842 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
5843 | |
5844 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version | |
5845 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. | |
5846 | |
5847 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were | |
5848 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) | |
5849 always increases point by 1. | |
5850 | |
5851 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is | |
5852 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. | |
5853 | |
5854 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
5855 | |
5856 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. | |
5857 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's | |
5858 default value changed. For example, | |
5859 | |
5860 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." | |
5861 :type 'integer | |
5862 :group 'foo | |
5863 :version "20.3") | |
5864 | |
5865 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." | |
5866 :version "20.3") | |
5867 | |
5868 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the | |
5869 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It | |
5870 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a | |
5871 `:version' in the top level group. | |
5872 | |
5873 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. | |
5874 | |
5875 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name | |
5876 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. | |
5877 | |
5878 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that | |
5879 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that | |
5880 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables | |
5881 to themselves. | |
5882 | |
5883 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, | |
5884 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any | |
5885 values whatever. | |
5886 | |
5887 ** There is a new debugger command, R. | |
5888 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result | |
5889 in the buffer *Debugger-record*. | |
5890 | |
5891 ** Frame-local variables. | |
5892 | |
5893 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call | |
5894 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have | |
5895 local bindings for that variable. | |
5896 | |
5897 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a | |
5898 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling | |
5899 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the | |
5900 parameter name. | |
5901 | |
5902 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. | |
5903 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is | |
5904 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, | |
5905 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. | |
5906 | |
5907 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not | |
5908 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a | |
5909 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect | |
5910 through a window-local binding would not be very robust. | |
5911 | |
5912 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing | |
5913 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when | |
5914 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form | |
5915 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. | |
5916 See the documentation in sregex.el. | |
5917 | |
5918 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which | |
5919 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to | |
5920 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. | |
5921 The contents of this field are not yet finalized. | |
5922 | |
5923 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. | |
5924 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. | |
5925 | |
5926 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from | |
5927 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can | |
5928 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. | |
5929 | |
5930 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE | |
5931 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as | |
5932 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the | |
5933 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. | |
5934 | |
5935 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to | |
5936 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters | |
5937 empty input. | |
5938 | |
5939 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use | |
5940 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to | |
5941 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. | |
5942 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as | |
5943 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. | |
5944 | |
5945 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, | |
5946 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: | |
5947 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a | |
5948 default password to use if the user enters nothing. | |
5949 | |
5950 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to | |
5951 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a | |
5952 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the | |
5953 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns | |
5954 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. | |
5955 | |
5956 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. | |
5957 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate | |
5958 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the | |
5959 end of the window, even if this requires computation. | |
5960 | |
5961 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME | |
5962 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. | |
5963 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. | |
5964 | |
5965 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, | |
5966 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window | |
5967 was directed to display this buffer. | |
5968 | |
5969 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects | |
5970 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they | |
5971 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in | |
5972 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to | |
5973 set-window-configuration. | |
5974 | |
5975 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two | |
5976 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer | |
5977 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of | |
5978 windows and the choice of buffers to display. | |
5979 | |
5980 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to | |
5981 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist | |
5982 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). | |
5983 | |
5984 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a | |
5985 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the | |
5986 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. | |
5987 | |
5988 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, | |
5989 and it is meant to be set by major modes. | |
5990 | |
5991 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string | |
5992 except that it discards all text properties from the result. | |
5993 | |
5994 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument | |
5995 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as | |
5996 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. | |
5997 | |
5998 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory | |
5999 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined | |
6000 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems | |
6001 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. | |
6002 | |
6003 ** Menu changes | |
6004 | |
6005 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the | |
6006 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now | |
6007 better supported. | |
6008 | |
6009 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls | |
6010 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when | |
6011 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you | |
6012 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; | |
6013 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. | |
6014 | |
6015 *** A new format for menu items is supported. | |
6016 | |
6017 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format | |
6018 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) | |
6019 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that | |
6020 starts with the symbol `menu-item'. | |
6021 | |
6022 The format is: | |
6023 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or | |
6024 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) | |
6025 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item | |
6026 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. | |
6027 The supported properties include | |
6028 | |
6029 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
6030 item is enabled. | |
6031 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the | |
6032 item should appear in the menu. | |
6033 :filter FILTER-FN | |
6034 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, | |
6035 which will be REAL-BINDING. | |
6036 It should return a binding to use instead. | |
6037 :keys DESCRIPTION | |
6038 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard | |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
6039 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with |
30922 | 6040 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used. |
6041 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE | |
6042 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent | |
6043 keyboard binding. | |
6044 :key-sequence nil | |
6045 This means that the command normally has no | |
6046 keyboard equivalent. | |
6047 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). | |
6048 :button (TYPE . SELECTED) | |
6049 TYPE is :toggle or :radio. | |
6050 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its | |
6051 value says whether this button is currently selected. | |
6052 | |
6053 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. | |
6054 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. | |
6055 | |
6056 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. | |
6057 | |
6058 ** New event types | |
6059 | |
6060 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a | |
6061 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that | |
6062 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, | |
6063 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: | |
6064 | |
6065 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) | |
6066 | |
6067 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
6068 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number | |
6069 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A | |
6070 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards | |
6071 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated | |
6072 forward, away from the user. | |
6073 | |
6074 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
6075 | |
6076 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of | |
6077 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged | |
6078 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of | |
6079 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically | |
6080 loaded into Emacs. The format is: | |
6081 | |
6082 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) | |
6083 | |
6084 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the | |
6085 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames | |
6086 that were dragged and dropped. | |
6087 | |
6088 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. | |
6089 | |
6090 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters. | |
6091 | |
6092 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; | |
6093 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way | |
6094 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. | |
6095 | |
6096 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You | |
6097 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character | |
6098 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. | |
6099 | |
6100 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were | |
6101 in Emacs 19 and before. | |
6102 | |
6103 The function chars-in-string has been deleted. | |
6104 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. | |
6105 | |
6106 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current | |
6107 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or | |
6108 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte | |
6109 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. | |
6110 | |
6111 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed | |
6112 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents | |
6113 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as | |
6114 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation | |
6115 will count as two characters using unibyte representation. | |
6116 | |
6117 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which | |
6118 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer | |
6119 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are | |
6120 consistent with the new representation. | |
6121 | |
6122 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte | |
6123 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care | |
6124 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; | |
6125 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
6126 | |
6127 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of | |
6128 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them | |
6129 using the table nonascii-translation-table. | |
6130 | |
6131 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte | |
6132 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the | |
6133 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. | |
6134 | |
6135 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation | |
6136 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically | |
6137 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. | |
6138 | |
6139 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
6140 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. | |
6141 | |
6142 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string | |
6143 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. | |
6144 | |
6145 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare | |
6146 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, | |
6147 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. | |
6148 You can specify whether to ignore case or not. | |
6149 | |
6150 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that | |
6151 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. | |
6152 | |
6153 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now | |
6154 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the | |
6155 buffer or string being searched. | |
6156 | |
6157 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of | |
6158 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when | |
6159 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when | |
6160 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no | |
6161 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what | |
6162 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular | |
6163 expression [^\0-\177] works for it. | |
6164 | |
6165 *** Structure of coding system changed. | |
6166 | |
6167 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named | |
6168 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector | |
6169 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector | |
6170 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this | |
6171 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define | |
6172 your own alias name of a coding system by the function | |
6173 define-coding-system-alias. | |
6174 | |
6175 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use | |
6176 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to | |
6177 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, | |
6178 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, | |
6179 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and | |
6180 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 | |
6181 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter | |
6182 `iso-8859-1'. | |
6183 | |
6184 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. | |
6185 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this | |
6186 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: | |
6187 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) | |
6188 | |
6189 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can | |
6190 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they | |
6191 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode | |
6192 the other character sets and read it back correctly. | |
6193 | |
6194 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a | |
6195 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. | |
6196 This function requires a user interaction. | |
6197 | |
6198 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and | |
6199 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by | |
6200 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding | |
6201 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want | |
6202 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of | |
6203 select-safe-coding-system. | |
6204 | |
6205 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as | |
6206 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set | |
6207 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding | |
6208 was done. | |
6209 | |
6210 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be | |
6211 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of | |
6212 coding systems used by some specific language environment. | |
6213 | |
6214 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always | |
6215 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII | |
6216 characters are found, they now return a list of single element | |
6217 `undecided' or its subsidiaries. | |
6218 | |
6219 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and | |
6220 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different | |
6221 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is | |
6222 converted. | |
6223 | |
6224 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a | |
6225 coding system for communicating with other X clients. | |
6226 | |
6227 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid | |
6228 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire | |
6229 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, | |
6230 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value | |
6231 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a | |
6232 range of characters. | |
6233 | |
6234 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a | |
6235 Lisp object is a valid character code or not. | |
6236 | |
6237 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character | |
6238 in the current buffer at position POS. | |
6239 | |
6240 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable | |
6241 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a | |
6242 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing | |
6243 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the | |
6244 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first | |
6245 binding input-method-function to nil. | |
6246 | |
6247 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input | |
6248 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as | |
6249 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by | |
6250 the input method function are not passed to the input method function, | |
6251 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. | |
6252 | |
6253 The input method function is not called when reading the second and | |
6254 subsequent events of a key sequence. | |
6255 | |
6256 *** You can customize any language environment by using | |
6257 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. | |
6258 | |
6259 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo | |
6260 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For | |
6261 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language | |
6262 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up | |
6263 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
6264 |
30922 | 6265 * Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
6266 | |
6267 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user | |
6268 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look | |
6269 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a | |
6270 tree structure. | |
6271 | |
6272 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each | |
6273 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. | |
6274 | |
6275 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs | |
6276 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically | |
6277 in your .emacs file.) | |
6278 | |
6279 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. | |
6280 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. | |
6281 | |
6282 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. | |
6283 This makes more space in the mode line for other information. | |
6284 | |
6285 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted | |
6286 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it | |
6287 kills the region. | |
6288 | |
6289 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they | |
6290 delete the character before point, as usual. | |
6291 | |
6292 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted | |
6293 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature | |
6294 by setting search-highlight to nil.) | |
6295 | |
6296 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to | |
6297 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, | |
6298 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked | |
6299 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the | |
6300 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the | |
6301 past.) | |
6302 | |
6303 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. | |
6304 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode | |
6305 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). | |
6306 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this | |
6307 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. | |
6308 | |
6309 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, | |
6310 and is an alias for it. | |
6311 | |
6312 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, | |
6313 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. | |
6314 | |
6315 ** Scrolling changes | |
6316 | |
6317 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen | |
6318 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. | |
6319 | |
6320 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing | |
6321 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line | |
6322 where it started. | |
6323 | |
6324 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you | |
6325 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the | |
6326 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that | |
6327 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. | |
6328 | |
6329 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the | |
6330 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point | |
6331 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs | |
6332 recenters the window. | |
6333 | |
6334 ** International character set support (MULE) | |
6335 | |
6336 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, | |
6337 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, | |
6338 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, | |
6339 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These | |
6340 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as | |
6341 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") | |
6342 | |
6343 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard | |
6344 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte | |
6345 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide | |
6346 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back | |
6347 into any of these coding systems when saving a file. | |
6348 | |
6349 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, | |
6350 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs | |
6351 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or | |
6352 language, to make it possible to type them. | |
6353 | |
6354 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII | |
6355 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. | |
6356 | |
6357 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain | |
6358 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. | |
6359 | |
6360 You can disable multibyte character support as follows: | |
6361 | |
6362 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) | |
6363 | |
6364 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte | |
6365 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second | |
6366 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are | |
6367 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte | |
6368 characters for their work until they want to change. | |
6369 | |
6370 *** Input methods | |
6371 | |
6372 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed | |
6373 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language | |
6374 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use | |
6375 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages | |
6376 support several input methods. | |
6377 | |
6378 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into | |
6379 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods | |
6380 work. | |
6381 | |
6382 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of | |
6383 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use | |
6384 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which | |
6385 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one | |
6386 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single | |
6387 letter. | |
6388 | |
6389 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed | |
6390 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. | |
6391 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone | |
6392 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are | |
6393 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". | |
6394 | |
6395 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so | |
6396 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using | |
6397 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs | |
6398 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. | |
6399 | |
6400 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled | |
6401 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; | |
6402 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if | |
6403 the first guess is wrong. | |
6404 | |
6405 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) | |
6406 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. | |
6407 | |
6408 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each | |
6409 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as | |
6410 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for | |
6411 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. | |
6412 | |
6413 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to | |
6414 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set | |
6415 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can | |
6416 translate automatically to and from either one. | |
6417 | |
6418 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. | |
6419 | |
6420 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a | |
6421 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte | |
6422 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not | |
6423 what you want. | |
6424 | |
6425 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for | |
6426 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding | |
6427 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off | |
6428 multibyte characters in that buffer. | |
6429 | |
6430 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off | |
6431 character conversion as well. | |
6432 | |
6433 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows. | |
6434 | |
6435 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. | |
6436 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports | |
6437 requires using many fonts. | |
6438 | |
6439 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a | |
6440 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. | |
6441 | |
6442 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by | |
6443 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you | |
6444 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as | |
6445 you would use a font. | |
6446 | |
6447 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it | |
6448 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot | |
6449 display that character. It will display an empty box instead. | |
6450 | |
6451 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters | |
6452 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII | |
6453 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, | |
6454 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, | |
6455 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. | |
6456 | |
6457 *** Defining fontsets. | |
6458 | |
6459 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still | |
6460 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset | |
6461 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. | |
6462 | |
6463 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value | |
6464 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is | |
6465 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the | |
6466 standard fontset are created automatically. | |
6467 | |
6468 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' | |
6469 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the | |
6470 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name | |
6471 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short | |
6472 name is `fontset-startup'. | |
6473 | |
6474 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... | |
6475 The resource value should have this form: | |
6476 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... | |
6477 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: | |
6478 * most fields should be just the wild card "*". | |
6479 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" | |
6480 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. | |
6481 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number | |
6482 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. | |
35863
534be6e166a6
Yet another bunch of typo fizes from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35862
diff
changeset
|
6483 CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME |
534be6e166a6
Yet another bunch of typo fizes from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35862
diff
changeset
|
6484 should specify an actual font to use for that character set. |
30922 | 6485 |
6486 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the | |
6487 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. | |
6488 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. | |
6489 | |
6490 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a | |
6491 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the | |
6492 following resource, | |
6493 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 | |
6494 the font for ASCII is generated as below: | |
6495 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 | |
6496 Here is the substitution rule: | |
6497 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset | |
6498 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has | |
6499 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce | |
6500 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. | |
6501 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) | |
6502 | |
6503 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the | |
6504 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call | |
6505 that function explicitly to create a fontset. | |
6506 | |
6507 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just | |
6508 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset | |
6509 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the | |
6510 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle | |
6511 fontsets. | |
6512 | |
6513 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs | |
6514 defaults for a particular choice of language. | |
6515 | |
6516 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input | |
6517 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when | |
6518 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have | |
6519 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The | |
6520 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding | |
6521 system for new files that you create. | |
6522 | |
6523 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use | |
6524 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the | |
6525 whole Emacs session. | |
6526 | |
6527 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET | |
6528 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this | |
6529 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). | |
6530 | |
6531 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) | |
6532 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This | |
6533 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving | |
6534 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the | |
6535 coding systems that Emacs supports. | |
6536 | |
6537 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) | |
6538 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. | |
6539 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. | |
6540 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system | |
6541 is used for *the immediately following command*. | |
6542 | |
6543 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or | |
6544 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. | |
6545 | |
6546 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, | |
6547 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. | |
6548 | |
6549 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET | |
6550 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. | |
6551 | |
6552 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- | |
6553 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- | |
6554 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also | |
6555 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end | |
6556 of the file. | |
6557 | |
6558 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies | |
6559 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character | |
6560 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are | |
6561 translated into that character code. | |
6562 | |
6563 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in | |
6564 various countries to support the languages of those countries. | |
6565 | |
6566 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. | |
6567 | |
6568 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies | |
6569 the coding system for keyboard input. | |
6570 | |
6571 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals | |
6572 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, | |
6573 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. | |
6574 | |
6575 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. | |
6576 | |
6577 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an | |
6578 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that | |
6579 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed | |
6580 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are | |
6581 designed to work with terminals. | |
6582 | |
6583 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) | |
6584 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. | |
6585 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess | |
6586 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify | |
6587 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command | |
6588 in the corresponding buffer. | |
6589 | |
6590 By default, process input and output are not translated at all. | |
6591 | |
6592 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system | |
6593 to use for encoding file names before operating on them. | |
6594 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. | |
6595 | |
6596 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates | |
6597 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the | |
6598 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you | |
6599 want to use. | |
6600 | |
6601 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input | |
6602 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. | |
6603 | |
6604 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard | |
6605 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this | |
6606 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify | |
6607 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. | |
6608 | |
6609 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays | |
6610 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus | |
6611 related information. | |
6612 | |
6613 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called | |
6614 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various | |
6615 scripts. | |
6616 | |
6617 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays | |
6618 information about the support for a particular language. | |
6619 You specify the language as an argument. | |
6620 | |
6621 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies | |
6622 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the | |
6623 first dash. | |
6624 | |
6625 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion | |
6626 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion | |
6627 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits | |
6628 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: | |
6629 | |
6630 A alternativnyj (Russian) | |
6631 B big5 (Chinese) | |
6632 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) | |
6633 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) | |
6634 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) | |
6635 E euc-japan (Japanese) | |
6636 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
6637 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) | |
6638 K euc-korea (Korean) | |
6639 R koi8 (Russian) | |
6640 Q tibetan | |
6641 S shift_jis (Japanese) | |
6642 T lao | |
6643 T tis620 (Thai) | |
6644 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) | |
6645 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) | |
6646 k iso-2022-kr (Korean) | |
6647 v viqr (Vietnamese) | |
6648 z hz (Chinese) | |
6649 | |
6650 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), | |
6651 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file | |
6652 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for | |
6653 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. | |
6654 | |
6655 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code | |
6656 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. | |
6657 | |
6658 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically | |
6659 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with | |
6660 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing | |
6661 Rmail files themselves. | |
6662 | |
6663 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code | |
6664 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. | |
6665 | |
6666 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system | |
6667 for sending mail: | |
6668 | |
6669 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. | |
6670 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. | |
6671 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, | |
6672 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. | |
6673 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. | |
6674 | |
6675 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument | |
6676 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, | |
6677 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional | |
6678 translations. | |
6679 | |
6680 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion | |
6681 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command | |
6682 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer | |
6683 without any conversion. | |
6684 | |
6685 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. | |
6686 You can now specify any number of octal digits. | |
6687 RET terminates the digits and is discarded; | |
6688 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. | |
6689 | |
6690 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for | |
6691 functions, variables and file names used in your programs. | |
6692 | |
6693 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. | |
6694 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. | |
6695 | |
6696 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major | |
6697 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. | |
6698 | |
6699 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command | |
6700 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name | |
6701 in the buffer before point. | |
6702 | |
6703 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of | |
6704 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that | |
6705 you are using. | |
6706 | |
6707 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, | |
6708 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). | |
6709 | |
6710 ** File locking works with NFS now. | |
6711 | |
6712 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, | |
6713 in the same directory as FILENAME. | |
6714 | |
6715 This means that collision detection between two different machines now | |
6716 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory | |
6717 can become a bottleneck. | |
6718 | |
6719 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection | |
6720 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot | |
6721 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the | |
6722 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are | |
6723 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is | |
6724 so useful that the change is worth while. | |
6725 | |
6726 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which | |
6727 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious | |
6728 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just | |
6729 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. | |
6730 | |
6731 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, | |
6732 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call | |
6733 show-paren-mode. | |
6734 | |
6735 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted | |
6736 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
6737 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. | |
6738 | |
6739 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words | |
6740 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load | |
6741 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. | |
6742 | |
6743 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, | |
6744 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also | |
6745 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. | |
6746 | |
6747 ** Changes in View mode. | |
6748 | |
6749 *** Several new commands are available in View mode. | |
6750 Do H in view mode for a list of commands. | |
6751 | |
6752 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode: | |
6753 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. | |
6754 | |
6755 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their | |
6756 previous state. | |
6757 | |
6758 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, | |
6759 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. | |
6760 | |
6761 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If | |
6762 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, | |
6763 not just the selected window. | |
6764 | |
6765 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a | |
6766 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only | |
6767 turns View mode on or off. | |
6768 | |
6769 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls | |
6770 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, | |
6771 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. | |
6772 | |
6773 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, | |
6774 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. | |
6775 | |
6776 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, | |
6777 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is | |
6778 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks | |
6779 which version to compare with. | |
6780 | |
6781 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden | |
6782 blocks if a match is inside the block. | |
6783 | |
6784 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match | |
6785 is outside the block. By customizing the variable | |
6786 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily | |
6787 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. | |
6788 | |
6789 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind | |
6790 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code | |
6791 blocks, all of them or none. | |
6792 | |
6793 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the | |
6794 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for | |
6795 confirmation first. | |
6796 | |
6797 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, | |
6798 now changes the major mode according to that file name. | |
6799 However, the mode will not be changed if | |
6800 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or | |
6801 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, | |
6802 not suitable for ordinary files, or | |
6803 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. | |
6804 | |
6805 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. | |
6806 | |
6807 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then | |
6808 these commands do not change the major mode. | |
6809 | |
6810 ** M-x occur changes. | |
6811 | |
6812 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, | |
6813 it performs a case-sensitive search. | |
6814 | |
6815 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, | |
6816 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search | |
6817 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. | |
6818 | |
6819 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted | |
6820 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the | |
6821 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in | |
6822 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same | |
6823 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. | |
6824 | |
6825 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates | |
6826 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings | |
6827 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents | |
6828 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. | |
6829 | |
6830 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
6831 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the | |
6832 buffers recently selected in the selected frame. | |
6833 | |
6834 ** Outline mode changes. | |
6835 | |
6836 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). | |
6837 | |
6838 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. | |
6839 | |
6840 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if | |
6841 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. | |
6842 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that | |
6843 was already active. | |
6844 | |
6845 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not | |
6846 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then | |
6847 get confused by it. | |
6848 | |
6849 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must | |
6850 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. | |
6851 | |
6852 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. | |
6853 | |
6854 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
6855 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first | |
6856 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion | |
6857 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. | |
6858 | |
6859 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has | |
6860 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always | |
6861 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. | |
6862 | |
6863 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' | |
6864 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible | |
6865 values. | |
6866 | |
6867 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve | |
6868 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). | |
6869 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore | |
6870 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). | |
6871 | |
6872 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a | |
6873 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they | |
6874 can be. The default value is 30. | |
6875 | |
6876 ** Changes in Mail mode. | |
6877 | |
6878 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. | |
6879 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail | |
6880 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable | |
6881 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is | |
6882 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old | |
6883 behavior. | |
6884 | |
6885 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs | |
6886 compose-mail-other-frame. | |
6887 | |
6888 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use | |
6889 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are | |
6890 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the | |
6891 buffer that shows the original message. | |
6892 | |
6893 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, | |
6894 with separator lines around the contents. | |
6895 | |
6896 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases | |
6897 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias | |
6898 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not | |
6899 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. | |
6900 | |
6901 *** New features in the mail-complete command. | |
6902 | |
6903 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, | |
6904 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style | |
6905 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. | |
6906 Its values are like those of mail-from-style. | |
6907 | |
6908 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command | |
6909 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in | |
6910 /etc/passwd. | |
6911 | |
6912 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read | |
6913 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: | |
6914 /etc/passwd. | |
6915 | |
6916 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of | |
6917 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a | |
6918 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a | |
6919 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. | |
6920 | |
6921 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as | |
6922 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise | |
6923 be taken to be magic. | |
6924 | |
6925 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select | |
6926 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is | |
6927 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. | |
6928 | |
6929 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. | |
6930 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) | |
6931 | |
6932 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names | |
6933 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. | |
6934 | |
6935 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. | |
6936 | |
6937 new key dired.el binding old key | |
6938 ------- ---------------- ------- | |
6939 * c dired-change-marks c | |
6940 * m dired-mark m | |
6941 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) | |
6942 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) | |
6943 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) | |
6944 * u dired-unmark u | |
6945 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL | |
6946 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-? | |
6947 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks | |
6948 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m | |
6949 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} | |
6950 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ | |
6951 | |
6952 ** Rmail changes. | |
6953 | |
6954 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it | |
6955 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer | |
6956 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing | |
6957 each time you run it. | |
6958 | |
6959 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls | |
6960 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. | |
6961 | |
6962 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete | |
6963 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument | |
6964 means to move in the opposite direction. | |
6965 | |
6966 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets | |
6967 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. | |
6968 | |
6969 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes | |
6970 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. | |
6971 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you | |
6972 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used | |
6973 for output. | |
6974 | |
6975 ** Gnus changes. | |
6976 | |
6977 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. | |
6978 | |
6979 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into | |
6980 Gnus. | |
6981 | |
6982 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like | |
6983 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. | |
6984 | |
6985 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the | |
6986 article mode line. | |
6987 | |
6988 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. | |
6989 | |
6990 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. | |
6991 | |
6992 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) | |
6993 | |
6994 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files | |
6995 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See | |
6996 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. | |
6997 | |
6998 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. | |
6999 | |
7000 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. | |
7001 | |
7002 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. | |
7003 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. | |
7004 | |
7005 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. | |
7006 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be | |
7007 used to pick articles. | |
7008 | |
7009 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to | |
7010 another have been added. | |
7011 | |
7012 `M-x gnus-change-server' | |
7013 | |
7014 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when | |
7015 generating lines in buffers. | |
7016 | |
7017 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with | |
7018 `M-C-_'. | |
7019 | |
7020 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. | |
7021 | |
7022 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: | |
7023 | |
7024 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) | |
7025 | |
7026 *** Scores can be decayed. | |
7027 | |
7028 (setq gnus-decay-scores t) | |
7029 | |
7030 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The | |
7031 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. | |
7032 | |
7033 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from | |
7034 the native server. | |
7035 | |
7036 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' | |
7037 | |
7038 *** A new command for reading collections of documents | |
7039 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'. | |
7040 | |
7041 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. | |
7042 | |
7043 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post | |
7044 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. | |
7045 | |
7046 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines | |
7047 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. | |
7048 | |
7049 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such | |
7050 a group. | |
7051 | |
7052 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard | |
7053 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. | |
7054 | |
7055 See the commands under the `T S' submap. | |
7056 | |
7057 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. | |
7058 | |
7059 See the commands under the `G P' submap. | |
7060 | |
7061 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. | |
7062 | |
7063 Use the `Y c' command. | |
7064 | |
7065 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. | |
7066 | |
7067 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. | |
7068 | |
7069 `M-x nnmail-split-history' | |
7070 | |
7071 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk | |
7072 from incoming mail before saving the mail. | |
7073 | |
7074 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. | |
7075 | |
7076 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. | |
7077 | |
7078 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute | |
7079 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. | |
7080 | |
7081 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) | |
7082 | |
7083 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically | |
7084 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime | |
7085 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this | |
7086 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling | |
7087 this issue.) | |
7088 | |
7089 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems | |
7090 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a | |
7091 particular news group. This can be done by: | |
7092 | |
7093 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) | |
7094 | |
7095 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree | |
7096 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under | |
7097 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding | |
7098 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both | |
7099 for reading and posting). | |
7100 | |
7101 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form | |
7102 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
7103 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the | |
7104 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages | |
7105 there. | |
7106 | |
7107 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by | |
7108 default. Here are some of these default settings: | |
7109 | |
7110 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) | |
7111 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
7112 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) | |
7113 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) | |
7114 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) | |
7115 | |
7116 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; | |
7117 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. | |
7118 | |
7119 ** CC mode changes. | |
7120 | |
7121 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) | |
7122 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global | |
7123 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do | |
7124 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. | |
7125 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is | |
7126 loaded. | |
7127 | |
7128 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, | |
7129 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode | |
7130 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers | |
7131 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set | |
7132 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you | |
7133 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. | |
7134 | |
7135 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name | |
7136 of the current buffer. | |
7137 | |
7138 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because | |
7139 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles | |
7140 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. | |
7141 | |
7142 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C | |
7143 style that the Python developers like. | |
7144 | |
7145 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. | |
7146 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, | |
7147 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. | |
7148 | |
7149 ** VC Changes [new] | |
7150 | |
7151 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot | |
7152 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current | |
7153 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). | |
7154 | |
7155 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common | |
7156 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other | |
7157 developers. | |
7158 | |
7159 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q | |
7160 RET in a buffer visiting that file. | |
7161 | |
7162 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by | |
7163 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a | |
7164 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then | |
7165 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. | |
7166 | |
7167 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for | |
7168 version numbers, based on the current state of the file. | |
7169 | |
7170 ** Calendar changes. | |
7171 | |
7172 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses | |
7173 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this | |
7174 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years. | |
7175 | |
7176 ** ps-print changes | |
7177 | |
7178 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout. | |
7179 | |
7180 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns | |
7181 | |
7182 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print | |
7183 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols: | |
7184 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid' | |
7185 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5' | |
7186 It defaults to `letter'. | |
7187 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'. | |
7188 | |
7189 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation | |
7190 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode, | |
7191 non-nil means "landscape" mode. | |
7192 | |
7193 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer. | |
7194 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode. | |
7195 It defaults to 1. | |
7196 | |
7197 *** Horizontal layout | |
7198 | |
7199 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables | |
7200 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'. | |
7201 All are measured in points. | |
7202 | |
7203 *** Vertical layout | |
7204 | |
7205 The vertical layout is determined by the variables | |
7206 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'. | |
7207 All are measured in points. | |
7208 | |
7209 *** Headers | |
7210 | |
7211 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then | |
7212 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the | |
7213 margin above the text. | |
7214 | |
7215 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy | |
7216 framing box is printed around the header. | |
7217 | |
7218 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines', | |
7219 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'. | |
7220 | |
7221 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad', | |
7222 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and | |
7223 `ps-header-font-size'. | |
7224 | |
7225 *** Font managing | |
7226 | |
7227 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be | |
7228 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist | |
7229 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding | |
7230 elements to this alist. | |
7231 | |
7232 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font | |
7233 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points. | |
7234 | |
7235 ** hideshow changes. | |
7236 | |
7237 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for | |
7238 C++, ; for lisp). | |
7239 | |
7240 *** Support for java-mode added. | |
7241 | |
7242 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments | |
7243 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. | |
7244 | |
35862
9604ca6b3728
More typos from Juanma Barranquero <lektu@uol.com.br>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
35847
diff
changeset
|
7245 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at |
30922 | 7246 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your |
7247 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. | |
7248 | |
7249 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more | |
7250 robust and a lot faster. | |
7251 | |
7252 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines. | |
7253 | |
7254 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow | |
7255 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the | |
7256 documentation for more details. | |
7257 | |
7258 ** Changes in Enriched mode. | |
7259 | |
7260 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is | |
7261 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent | |
7262 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in | |
7263 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled | |
7264 the next time unless the fill-column is different. | |
7265 | |
7266 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs | |
7267 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines | |
7268 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked | |
7269 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. | |
7270 | |
7271 ** Font Lock mode | |
7272 | |
7273 *** Custom support | |
7274 | |
7275 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and | |
7276 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the | |
7277 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom | |
7278 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in | |
7279 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should | |
7280 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. | |
7281 | |
7282 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. | |
7283 | |
7284 *** Maximum decoration | |
7285 | |
7286 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by | |
7287 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level | |
7288 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration | |
7289 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil | |
7290 to get the old behavior. | |
7291 | |
7292 *** New support | |
7293 | |
7294 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. | |
7295 | |
7296 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes | |
7297 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. | |
7298 | |
7299 *** Configurable support | |
7300 | |
7301 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for | |
7302 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, | |
7303 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, | |
7304 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a | |
7305 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value | |
7306 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the | |
7307 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. | |
7308 | |
7309 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever | |
7310 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make | |
7311 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. | |
7312 | |
7313 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support | |
7314 | |
7315 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own | |
7316 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, | |
7317 for any mode. | |
7318 | |
7319 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: | |
7320 | |
7321 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) | |
7322 | |
7323 in your ~/.emacs. | |
7324 | |
7325 *** New faces | |
7326 | |
7327 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and | |
7328 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, | |
7329 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought | |
7330 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. | |
7331 | |
7332 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode | |
7333 | |
7334 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process | |
7335 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the | |
7336 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. | |
7337 | |
7338 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode | |
7339 | |
7340 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify | |
7341 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use | |
7342 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If | |
7343 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be | |
7344 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only | |
7345 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy | |
7346 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. | |
7347 | |
7348 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. | |
7349 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if | |
7350 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly | |
7351 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line | |
7352 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use | |
7353 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. | |
7354 | |
7355 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: | |
7356 | |
7357 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. | |
7358 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. | |
7359 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the | |
7360 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. | |
7361 | |
7362 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those | |
7363 settings. | |
7364 | |
7365 ** Ada mode changes. | |
7366 | |
7367 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. | |
7368 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same | |
7369 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but | |
7370 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure | |
7371 stubs. | |
7372 | |
7373 *** There are two new commands: | |
7374 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer | |
7375 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. | |
7376 | |
7377 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', | |
7378 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and | |
7379 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. | |
7380 | |
7381 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level | |
7382 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. | |
7383 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. | |
7384 | |
7385 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of | |
7386 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, | |
7387 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one | |
7388 space between a comma and the beginning of a word. | |
7389 | |
7390 ** Scheme mode changes. | |
7391 | |
7392 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp | |
7393 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used | |
7394 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables | |
7395 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer | |
7396 have any effect. | |
7397 | |
7398 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is | |
7399 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to | |
7400 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation | |
7401 variables as buffer-local variables. | |
7402 | |
7403 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. | |
7404 Use M-x dsssl-mode. | |
7405 | |
7406 ** Changes to the emacsclient program | |
7407 | |
7408 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or | |
7409 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID | |
7410 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root | |
7411 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. | |
7412 | |
7413 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells | |
7414 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the | |
7415 buffer in Emacs. | |
7416 | |
7417 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to | |
7418 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable | |
7419 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line | |
7420 option takes precedence. | |
7421 | |
7422 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area | |
7423 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point | |
7424 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). | |
7425 | |
7426 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, | |
7427 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just | |
7428 the current defun. | |
7429 | |
7430 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all | |
7431 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. | |
7432 | |
7433 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, | |
7434 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if | |
7435 necessary). | |
7436 | |
7437 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, | |
7438 if there are any registers that save positions in the file, | |
7439 these register values no longer become completely useless. | |
7440 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are | |
7441 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, | |
7442 it visits the file and then goes to the same position. | |
7443 | |
7444 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for | |
7445 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may | |
7446 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever | |
7447 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. | |
7448 | |
7449 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the | |
7450 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a | |
7451 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and | |
7452 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but | |
7453 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. | |
7454 | |
7455 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font | |
7456 since it applies only to the current frame. | |
7457 | |
7458 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the | |
7459 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, | |
7460 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) | |
7461 | |
7462 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of | |
7463 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local | |
7464 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for | |
7465 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document | |
7466 instead of just the file you are editing. | |
7467 | |
7468 ** RefTeX mode | |
7469 | |
7470 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref | |
7471 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of | |
7472 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for | |
7473 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and | |
7474 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: | |
7475 | |
7476 C-c ( reftex-label | |
7477 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and | |
7478 knows which kind of label is needed. | |
7479 | |
7480 C-c ) reftex-reference | |
7481 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the | |
7482 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. | |
7483 | |
7484 C-c [ reftex-citation | |
7485 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX | |
7486 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. | |
7487 | |
7488 C-c & reftex-view-crossref | |
7489 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. | |
7490 | |
7491 C-c = reftex-toc | |
7492 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you | |
7493 can quickly jump to every section. | |
7494 | |
7495 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional | |
7496 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. | |
7497 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file | |
7498 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: | |
7499 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el | |
7500 | |
7501 ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
7502 | |
7503 *** Info documentation is now available. | |
7504 | |
7505 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused | |
7506 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. | |
7507 | |
7508 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to | |
7509 bibtex-user-optional-fields. | |
7510 | |
7511 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote | |
7512 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). | |
7513 | |
7514 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete | |
7515 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by | |
7516 appropriate functions. | |
7517 | |
7518 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of | |
7519 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h. | |
7520 | |
7521 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has | |
7522 been cleaned. | |
7523 | |
7524 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables | |
7525 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. | |
7526 | |
7527 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries | |
7528 shall be delimited. | |
7529 | |
7530 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of | |
7531 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and | |
7532 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. | |
7533 | |
7534 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor | |
7535 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are | |
7536 prefixed with `ALT'. | |
7537 | |
7538 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable | |
7539 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many | |
7540 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable | |
7541 documentation). | |
7542 | |
7543 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See | |
7544 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions | |
7545 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. | |
7546 | |
7547 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if | |
7548 comma should be inserted at end of last field. | |
7549 | |
7550 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if | |
7551 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal | |
7552 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). | |
7553 | |
7554 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. | |
7555 | |
7556 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. | |
7557 | |
7558 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database | |
7559 from alien sources. | |
7560 | |
7561 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) | |
7562 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in | |
7563 crossref entries. | |
7564 | |
7565 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or | |
7566 region. | |
7567 | |
7568 *** Added support for imenu. | |
7569 | |
7570 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead | |
7571 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a | |
7572 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. | |
7573 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. | |
7574 | |
7575 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files | |
7576 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. | |
7577 | |
7578 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. | |
7579 | |
7580 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. | |
7581 | |
7582 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the | |
7583 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. | |
7584 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory | |
7585 as an argument. | |
7586 | |
7587 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read | |
7588 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). | |
7589 | |
7590 ** browse-url changes | |
7591 | |
7592 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), | |
7593 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window | |
7594 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic | |
7595 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated | |
7596 customization variables. | |
7597 | |
7598 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. | |
7599 | |
7600 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across | |
7601 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps | |
7602 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. | |
7603 | |
7604 ** Changes in Ediff | |
7605 | |
7606 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel | |
7607 pops up the Info file for this command. | |
7608 | |
7609 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether | |
7610 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when | |
7611 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different | |
7612 directories). | |
7613 | |
7614 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare | |
7615 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of | |
7616 files in the same directory. | |
7617 | |
7618 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. | |
7619 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug | |
7620 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) | |
7621 | |
7622 ** Changes in Viper | |
7623 | |
7624 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip | |
7625 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- | |
7626 instead of vip-. | |
7627 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. | |
7628 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next | |
7629 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. | |
7630 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. | |
7631 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. | |
7632 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor | |
7633 color when Viper is in insert state. | |
7634 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, | |
7635 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable | |
7636 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. | |
7637 | |
7638 ** Etags changes. | |
7639 | |
7640 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by | |
7641 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. | |
7642 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag | |
7643 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does | |
7644 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. | |
7645 | |
7646 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. | |
7647 | |
7648 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" | |
7649 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. | |
7650 | |
7651 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are | |
7652 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). | |
7653 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. | |
7654 | |
7655 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and | |
7656 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags | |
7657 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, | |
7658 methods and protocols. | |
7659 | |
7660 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension | |
7661 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in | |
7662 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a | |
7663 paragraph name. | |
7664 | |
7665 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of | |
7666 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression | |
7667 at least M times and as many as N times. | |
7668 | |
7669 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert | |
7670 in files has changed slightly. | |
7671 | |
7672 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, | |
7673 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. | |
7674 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility | |
7675 with old time-stamp-format values. | |
7676 | |
7677 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign | |
7678 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. | |
7679 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility | |
7680 reasons. | |
7681 | |
7682 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their | |
7683 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a | |
7684 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon | |
7685 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical | |
7686 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are | |
7687 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". | |
7688 | |
7689 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the | |
7690 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit | |
7691 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. | |
7692 | |
7693 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are | |
7694 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the | |
7695 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being | |
7696 recommended now will continue to work then. | |
7697 | |
7698 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for | |
7699 details. | |
7700 | |
7701 ** There are some additional major modes: | |
7702 | |
7703 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. | |
7704 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. | |
7705 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. | |
7706 | |
7707 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you | |
7708 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell | |
7709 into Emacs. | |
7710 | |
7711 ** New Lisp packages include: | |
7712 | |
7713 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. | |
7714 | |
7715 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might | |
7716 be used for adding some indecent words to your email. | |
7717 | |
7718 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. | |
7719 | |
7720 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes | |
7721 in shell buffers. | |
7722 | |
7723 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. | |
7724 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' | |
7725 and `elint-defun'. | |
7726 | |
7727 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is | |
7728 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary | |
7729 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within | |
7730 strings or comments. | |
7731 | |
7732 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an | |
7733 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, | |
7734 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these | |
7735 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text | |
7736 at these points. | |
7737 | |
7738 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you | |
7739 can visit them by short forms of their names. | |
7740 | |
7741 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded | |
7742 Emacs Lisp function at point. | |
7743 | |
7744 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. | |
7745 | |
7746 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like | |
7747 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. | |
7748 | |
7749 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. | |
7750 | |
7751 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. | |
7752 | |
7753 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. | |
7754 | |
7755 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations | |
7756 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. | |
7757 | |
7758 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. | |
7759 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically | |
7760 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its | |
7761 original place after inserting the copy. | |
7762 | |
7763 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 | |
7764 on the buffer. | |
7765 | |
7766 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the | |
7767 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll | |
7768 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. | |
7769 | |
7770 Enable mouse-drag with: | |
7771 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) | |
7772 -or- | |
7773 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) | |
7774 | |
7775 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have | |
7776 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. | |
7777 | |
7778 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. | |
7779 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. | |
7780 | |
7781 *** ogonek | |
7782 | |
7783 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of | |
7784 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various | |
7785 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and | |
7786 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to | |
7787 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to | |
7788 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for | |
7789 instance) and vice versa. | |
7790 | |
7791 To use this package load it using | |
7792 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek | |
7793 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of | |
7794 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish | |
7795 M-x ogonek-how -- in English | |
7796 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the | |
7797 ways of customization in `.emacs'. | |
7798 | |
7799 *** Interface to ph. | |
7800 | |
7801 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) | |
7802 | |
7803 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory | |
7804 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to | |
7805 these servers. | |
7806 | |
7807 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. | |
7808 | |
7809 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. | |
7810 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands | |
7811 while the real cursor does not move. | |
7812 | |
7813 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up | |
7814 for visiting your favorite web sites. | |
7815 | |
7816 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, | |
7817 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. | |
7818 | |
7819 ** movemail change | |
7820 | |
7821 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP | |
7822 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer | |
7823 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the | |
7824 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. | |
7825 | |
7826 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
7827 |
30922 | 7828 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. |
7829 | |
7830 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. | |
7831 | |
7832 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing | |
7833 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the | |
7834 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific | |
7835 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special | |
7836 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. | |
7837 | |
7838 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use | |
7839 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different | |
7840 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly | |
7841 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with | |
7842 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to | |
7843 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
7844 |
30922 | 7845 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
7846 | |
7847 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in | |
7848 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And | |
7849 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in | |
7850 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. | |
7851 | |
7852 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed | |
7853 to start with w32- instead of win32-. | |
7854 | |
7855 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We | |
7856 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it | |
7857 "win". | |
7858 | |
7859 ** Basic Lisp changes | |
7860 | |
7861 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically | |
7862 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. | |
7863 | |
7864 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now | |
7865 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program | |
7866 or by the user. | |
7867 | |
7868 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. | |
7869 | |
7870 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless' | |
7871 | |
7872 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) | |
7873 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) | |
7874 | |
7875 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their | |
7876 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of | |
7877 its argument. | |
7878 | |
7879 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. | |
7880 | |
7881 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. | |
7882 | |
7883 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. | |
7884 | |
7885 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an | |
7886 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives | |
7887 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the | |
7888 `format' function. | |
7889 | |
7890 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el | |
7891 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file | |
7892 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. | |
7893 | |
7894 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain | |
7895 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on | |
7896 adding one of these suffixes. | |
7897 | |
7898 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE | |
7899 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. | |
7900 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. | |
7901 | |
7902 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, | |
7903 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. | |
7904 | |
7905 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. | |
7906 | |
7907 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. | |
7908 You must load the `cl' library to define it. | |
7909 | |
7910 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression | |
7911 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: | |
7912 | |
7913 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) | |
7914 | |
7915 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. | |
7916 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. | |
7917 | |
7918 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the | |
7919 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or | |
7920 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' | |
7921 works using `save-current-buffer'. | |
7922 | |
7923 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and | |
7924 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value | |
7925 of the last form. | |
7926 | |
7927 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, | |
7928 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the | |
7929 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) | |
7930 as the last form. | |
7931 | |
7932 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain | |
7933 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the | |
7934 matches. | |
7935 | |
7936 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). | |
7937 | |
7938 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions | |
7939 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. | |
7940 Then it returns that string. | |
7941 | |
7942 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', | |
7943 | |
7944 (with-output-to-string | |
7945 (princ "The buffer is ") | |
7946 (princ (buffer-name))) | |
7947 | |
7948 returns "The buffer is foo". | |
7949 | |
7950 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters | |
7951 is non-nil. | |
7952 | |
7953 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the | |
7954 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte | |
7955 characters that occupy several buffer positions each. | |
7956 | |
7957 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in | |
7958 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). | |
7959 | |
7960 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; | |
7961 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. | |
7962 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer | |
7963 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole | |
7964 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to | |
7965 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). | |
7966 | |
7967 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. | |
7968 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent | |
7969 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte | |
7970 characters". | |
7971 | |
7972 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 | |
7973 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called | |
7974 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the | |
7975 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the | |
7976 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. | |
7977 | |
7978 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore | |
7979 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a | |
7980 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a | |
7981 character, which may be more than one buffer position. | |
7982 | |
7983 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is | |
7984 always one buffer position, need to be changed. | |
7985 | |
7986 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. | |
7987 | |
7988 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, | |
7989 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters | |
7990 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, | |
7991 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, | |
7992 guaranteed. | |
7993 | |
7994 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is | |
7995 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a | |
7996 character). | |
7997 | |
7998 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: | |
7999 | |
8000 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, | |
8001 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, | |
8002 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, | |
8003 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, | |
8004 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. | |
8005 | |
8006 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. | |
8007 | |
8008 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function | |
8009 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be | |
8010 more than the number of characters. | |
8011 | |
8012 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing | |
8013 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, | |
8014 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which | |
8015 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to | |
8016 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and | |
8017 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. | |
8018 | |
8019 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters | |
8020 and returns a string containing those characters. | |
8021 | |
8022 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. | |
8023 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX | |
8024 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a | |
8025 character, sref signals an error. | |
8026 | |
8027 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters | |
8028 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the | |
8029 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
8030 | |
8031 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters | |
8032 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the | |
8033 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). | |
8034 | |
8035 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of | |
8036 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string | |
8037 to a vector of the characters in it. | |
8038 | |
8039 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents | |
8040 of a string. You call it as follows: | |
8041 | |
8042 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) | |
8043 | |
8044 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in | |
8045 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. | |
8046 This function really does alter the contents of STRING. | |
8047 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, | |
8048 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. | |
8049 | |
8050 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, | |
8051 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
8052 | |
8053 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, | |
8054 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. | |
8055 | |
8056 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, | |
8057 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does | |
8058 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string | |
8059 which contains all or just part of the existing string.) | |
8060 | |
8061 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) | |
8062 | |
8063 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. | |
8064 | |
8065 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. | |
8066 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string | |
8067 are not included in the resulting value. | |
8068 | |
8069 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added | |
8070 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly | |
8071 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING | |
8072 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. | |
8073 | |
8074 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean | |
8075 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one | |
8076 character extends across that column), then the padding character | |
8077 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result | |
8078 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at | |
8079 column START-COLUMN. | |
8080 | |
8081 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, | |
8082 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not | |
8083 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the | |
8084 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the | |
8085 changed text, before the change. | |
8086 | |
8087 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character | |
8088 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is | |
8089 one character set for each script, not for each language. | |
8090 | |
8091 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. | |
8092 | |
8093 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. | |
8094 | |
8095 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character | |
8096 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) | |
8097 | |
8098 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the | |
8099 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values | |
8100 which identify the character within that character set. | |
8101 | |
8102 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent | |
8103 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the | |
8104 opposite of split-char. | |
8105 | |
8106 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets | |
8107 of all the characters between BEG and END. | |
8108 | |
8109 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets | |
8110 of all the characters in a string. | |
8111 | |
8112 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems | |
8113 and specifying coding systems. | |
8114 | |
8115 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding | |
8116 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list | |
8117 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. | |
8118 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix | |
8119 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well | |
8120 as what to do about code conversion.) | |
8121 | |
8122 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system | |
8123 name. It returns t if so, nil if not. | |
8124 | |
8125 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
8126 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
8127 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. | |
8128 | |
8129 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
8130 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp | |
8131 to match against a file name. | |
8132 | |
8133 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
8134 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
8135 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
8136 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
8137 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
8138 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
8139 | |
8140 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
8141 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
8142 | |
8143 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies | |
8144 the coding system to use for network sockets. | |
8145 | |
8146 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines | |
8147 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be | |
8148 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network | |
8149 service names. | |
8150 | |
8151 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or | |
8152 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both | |
8153 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent | |
8154 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding | |
8155 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr | |
8156 specifies the coding system for encoding. | |
8157 | |
8158 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system | |
8159 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. | |
8160 | |
8161 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use | |
8162 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, | |
8163 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to | |
8164 start the subprocess. | |
8165 | |
8166 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding | |
8167 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, | |
8168 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell | |
8169 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output | |
8170 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. | |
8171 | |
8172 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the | |
8173 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous | |
8174 subprocess. | |
8175 | |
8176 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, | |
8177 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you | |
8178 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or | |
8179 connection permanently or until overridden. | |
8180 | |
8181 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over | |
8182 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and | |
8183 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a | |
8184 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. | |
8185 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding | |
8186 system for one operation at a time. | |
8187 | |
8188 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from | |
8189 files, subprocesses or network connections. | |
8190 | |
8191 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what | |
8192 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. | |
8193 The value is a cons cell, | |
8194 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) | |
8195 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from | |
8196 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding | |
8197 input to the subprocess. | |
8198 | |
8199 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to | |
8200 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. | |
8201 | |
8202 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many | |
8203 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, | |
8204 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. | |
8205 | |
8206 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option | |
8207 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of | |
8208 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are | |
8209 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for | |
8210 customization. | |
8211 | |
8212 Thus, instead of writing | |
8213 | |
8214 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil | |
8215 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") | |
8216 | |
8217 you would now write this: | |
8218 | |
8219 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil | |
8220 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." | |
8221 :type 'boolean | |
8222 :group foo) | |
8223 | |
8224 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only | |
8225 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values | |
8226 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom | |
8227 for a description of them. | |
8228 | |
8229 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option | |
8230 should belong to. You define a new group like this: | |
8231 | |
8232 (defgroup ispell nil | |
8233 "Spell checking using Ispell." | |
8234 :group 'processes) | |
8235 | |
8236 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root | |
8237 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, | |
8238 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond | |
8239 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come | |
8240 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. | |
8241 | |
8242 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple | |
8243 package should have just one group; a more complex package should | |
8244 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a | |
8245 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" | |
8246 first-level subgroups. | |
8247 | |
8248 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. | |
8249 | |
8250 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a | |
8251 separate manual that accompanies Emacs. | |
8252 | |
8253 ** easy-mmode | |
8254 | |
8255 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make | |
8256 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code | |
8257 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, | |
8258 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro | |
8259 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also | |
8260 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'. | |
8261 | |
8262 ** Text property changes | |
8263 | |
8264 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a | |
8265 text property. | |
8266 | |
8267 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and | |
8268 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a | |
8269 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The | |
8270 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the | |
8271 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. | |
8272 | |
8273 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If | |
8274 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part | |
8275 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the | |
8276 position of the beginning or end of the buffer. | |
8277 | |
8278 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property | |
8279 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This | |
8280 is an alternative to using the keymap itself. | |
8281 | |
8282 ** Changes in invisibility features | |
8283 | |
8284 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are | |
8285 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match | |
8286 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay | |
8287 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that | |
8288 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should | |
8289 make the overlay visible. | |
8290 | |
8291 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the | |
8292 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are | |
8293 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary | |
8294 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is | |
8295 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and | |
8296 t when it should hide it. | |
8297 | |
8298 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec | |
8299 | |
8300 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the | |
8301 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) | |
8302 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. | |
8303 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to | |
8304 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. | |
8305 Here is an example of how to do this: | |
8306 | |
8307 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis: | |
8308 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
8309 ;; If you don't want ellipsis: | |
8310 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
8311 | |
8312 ... | |
8313 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) | |
8314 | |
8315 ... | |
8316 ;; When done with the overlays: | |
8317 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) | |
8318 ;; Or respectively: | |
8319 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) | |
8320 | |
8321 ** Changes in syntax parsing. | |
8322 | |
8323 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as | |
8324 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now | |
8325 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable | |
8326 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. | |
8327 | |
8328 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior | |
8329 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always | |
8330 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. | |
8331 | |
8332 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a | |
8333 character in the buffer is calculated thus: | |
8334 | |
8335 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character | |
8336 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; | |
8337 | |
8338 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid | |
8339 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., | |
8340 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). | |
8341 | |
8342 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property | |
8343 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used | |
8344 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to | |
8345 determine the syntax type of the character. | |
8346 | |
8347 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table | |
8348 of the current buffer. | |
8349 | |
8350 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the | |
8351 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as | |
8352 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. | |
8353 | |
8354 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 | |
8355 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended | |
8356 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A | |
8357 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by | |
8358 another character with the same code (unless quoted). | |
8359 | |
8360 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' | |
8361 text property. | |
8362 | |
8363 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth | |
8364 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start | |
8365 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. | |
8366 | |
8367 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' | |
8368 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth | |
8369 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; | |
8370 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the | |
8371 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. | |
8372 | |
8373 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete | |
8374 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports | |
8375 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. | |
8376 | |
8377 ** Changes in face features | |
8378 | |
8379 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even | |
8380 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. | |
8381 | |
8382 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string | |
8383 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). | |
8384 | |
8385 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. | |
8386 set-face-bold-p sets that flag. | |
8387 | |
8388 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. | |
8389 set-face-italic-p sets that flag. | |
8390 | |
8391 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text | |
8392 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) | |
8393 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in | |
8394 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an | |
8395 overlay property). | |
8396 | |
8397 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use | |
8398 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. | |
8399 | |
8400 ** Changes in file-handling functions | |
8401 | |
8402 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant | |
8403 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, | |
8404 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion | |
8405 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. | |
8406 | |
8407 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name | |
8408 begins with ~. | |
8409 | |
8410 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, | |
8411 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. | |
8412 | |
8413 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if | |
8414 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. | |
8415 | |
8416 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, | |
8417 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. | |
8418 | |
8419 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses | |
8420 character code conversion as well as other things. | |
8421 | |
8422 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names | |
8423 (formerly it did not). | |
8424 | |
8425 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR | |
8426 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. | |
8427 | |
8428 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps | |
8429 instead of constant strings. | |
8430 | |
8431 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used | |
8432 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of | |
8433 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. | |
8434 | |
8435 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, | |
8436 in the same way as before. | |
8437 | |
8438 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. | |
8439 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings | |
8440 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. | |
8441 | |
8442 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an | |
8443 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing | |
8444 else, and returns nil. | |
8445 | |
8446 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified | |
8447 directory cannot be listed. | |
8448 | |
8449 ** Changes in minibuffer input | |
8450 | |
8451 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string | |
8452 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an | |
8453 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this | |
8454 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two | |
8455 ways: | |
8456 | |
8457 It is returned if the user enters empty input. | |
8458 It is available through the history command M-n. | |
8459 | |
8460 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, | |
8461 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional | |
8462 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the | |
8463 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of | |
8464 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. | |
8465 | |
8466 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an | |
8467 argument in this way. | |
8468 | |
8469 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties | |
8470 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable | |
8471 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. | |
8472 | |
8473 ** Echo area features | |
8474 | |
8475 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook | |
8476 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the | |
8477 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active | |
8478 after the echo area is cleared. | |
8479 | |
8480 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed | |
8481 in the echo area, or nil if there is none. | |
8482 | |
8483 ** Keyboard input features | |
8484 | |
8485 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was | |
8486 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. | |
8487 | |
8488 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events | |
8489 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated | |
8490 by keyboard macros. | |
8491 | |
8492 ** Frame-related changes | |
8493 | |
8494 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before | |
8495 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal | |
8496 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. | |
8497 | |
8498 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time | |
8499 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration | |
8500 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. | |
8501 | |
8502 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently | |
8503 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the | |
8504 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed | |
8505 in the selected frame. | |
8506 | |
8507 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars | |
8508 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies | |
8509 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. | |
8510 | |
8511 ** X Windows features | |
8512 | |
8513 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding | |
8514 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of | |
8515 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. | |
8516 | |
8517 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. | |
8518 The menu displays the current status of the box or button. | |
8519 | |
8520 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument | |
8521 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. | |
8522 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. | |
8523 | |
8524 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, | |
8525 it is good to supply 1 for this argument. | |
8526 | |
8527 ** Subprocess features | |
8528 | |
8529 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter | |
8530 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this | |
8531 automatically. | |
8532 | |
8533 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command | |
8534 and returns the output from the command as a string. | |
8535 | |
8536 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, | |
8537 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. | |
8538 | |
8539 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook | |
8540 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. | |
8541 | |
8542 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes | |
8543 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it | |
8544 goes after the other menu items. | |
8545 | |
8546 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area | |
8547 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls | |
8548 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks | |
8549 are in use. | |
8550 | |
8551 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a | |
8552 series of several changes--if that seems safe. | |
8553 | |
8554 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and | |
8555 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls | |
8556 form. | |
8557 | |
8558 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION | |
8559 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, | |
8560 but its hook is still run. | |
8561 | |
8562 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) | |
8563 for errors that are handled by condition-case. | |
8564 | |
8565 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called | |
8566 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is | |
8567 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. | |
8568 | |
8569 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that | |
8570 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process | |
8571 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't | |
8572 warned. | |
8573 | |
8574 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own | |
8575 way for Emacs to "ring the bell". | |
8576 | |
8577 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at | |
8578 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for | |
8579 functions like display-time. | |
8580 | |
8581 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file | |
8582 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. | |
8583 | |
8584 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that | |
8585 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode | |
8586 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. | |
8587 | |
8588 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code | |
8589 if there is an error in compilation. | |
8590 | |
8591 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and | |
8592 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional | |
8593 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, | |
8594 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. | |
8595 | |
8596 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, | |
8597 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing | |
8598 the *scratch* buffer. | |
8599 | |
8600 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. | |
8601 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used | |
8602 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, | |
8603 e.g., in Font Lock mode. | |
8604 | |
8605 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, | |
8606 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. | |
8607 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. | |
8608 | |
8609 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message | |
8610 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the | |
8611 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window | |
8612 and compose-mail-other-frame. | |
8613 | |
8614 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which | |
8615 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The | |
8616 full name of the specified user will be returned. | |
8617 | |
8618 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort | |
8619 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding | |
8620 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found | |
8621 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q | |
8622 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization | |
8623 files at all. | |
8624 | |
8625 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width | |
8626 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field | |
8627 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start | |
8628 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. | |
8629 | |
8630 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the | |
8631 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad | |
8632 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that | |
8633 is how %S normally pads to two positions. | |
8634 | |
8635 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. | |
8636 | |
8637 ** imenu.el changes. | |
8638 | |
8639 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an | |
8640 item from menu created by imenu. | |
8641 | |
8642 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the | |
8643 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we | |
8644 select one of those items. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
8645 |
30922 | 8646 * For older news, see the file ONEWS |
25853 | 8647 |
8648 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
8649 Copyright information: | |
8650 | |
35326
f30feeecf1c1
backward-delete-char-untabify-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
8651 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25853 | 8652 |
8653 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies | |
8654 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the | |
8655 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, | |
8656 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. | |
8657 | |
8658 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions | |
8659 of this document, or of portions of it, | |
8660 under the above conditions, provided also that they | |
8661 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. | |
35577
db5649648a65
Replace formfeeds removed on 2001/01/22.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
35567
diff
changeset
|
8662 |
25853 | 8663 Local variables: |
8664 mode: outline | |
8665 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" | |
8666 end: |